RAD Data comm Network Router E1 T1 User Guide
Installation and Operation Manual  
FCD-IPM  
E1/T1 or Fractional E1/T1  
Modular Access Device  
with Integrated Router  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM  
E1/T1 or Fractional E1/T1 Modular Access Device with  
Integrated Router  
Installation and Operation Manual  
Notice  
This manual contains information that is proprietary to RAD Data Communications Ltd. ("RAD"). No  
part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written approval by  
RAD Data Communications.  
Right, title and interest, all information, copyrights, patents, know-how, trade secrets and other  
intellectual property or other proprietary rights relating to this manual and to the FCD-IPM and any  
software components contained therein are proprietary products of RAD protected under international  
copyright law and shall be and remain solely with RAD.  
FCD-IPM is a registered trademark of RAD. No right, license, or interest to such trademark is granted  
hereunder, and you agree that no such right, license, or interest shall be asserted by you with respect  
to such trademark.  
You shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the Manual or the FCD-  
IPM. You are prohibited from, and shall not, directly or indirectly, develop, market, distribute, license,  
or sell any product that supports substantially similar functionality as the FCD-IPM, based on or derived  
in any way from the FCD-IPM. Your undertaking in this paragraph shall survive the termination of this  
Agreement.  
This Agreement is effective upon your opening of the FCD-IPM package and shall continue until  
terminated. RAD may terminate this Agreement upon the breach by you of any term hereof. Upon  
such termination by RAD, you agree to return to RAD the FCD-IPM and all copies and portions  
thereof.  
For further information contact RAD at the address below or contact your local distributor.  
International Headquarters  
RAD Data Communications Ltd.  
U.S. Headquarters  
RAD Data Communications Inc.  
24 Raoul Wallenberg St.  
Tel Aviv 69719 Israel  
Tel: 972-3-6458181  
Fax: 972-3-6498250  
E-mail: [email protected]  
900 Corporate Drive  
Mahwah, NJ 07430 USA  
Tel: (201) 529-1100, Toll free: 1-800-444-7234  
Fax: (201) 529-5777  
E-mail: [email protected]  
© 1991-2003 RAD Data Communications Ltd.  
Publication No. 702-200-08/03  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Limited Warranty  
RAD warrants to DISTRIBUTOR that the hardware in the FCD-IPM to be delivered hereunder shall be  
free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of twelve (12)  
months following the date of shipment to DISTRIBUTOR.  
If, during the warranty period, any component part of the equipment becomes defective by reason of  
material or workmanship, and DISTRIBUTOR immediately notifies RAD of such defect, RAD shall have  
the option to choose the appropriate corrective action: a) supply a replacement part, or b) request  
return of equipment to its plant for repair, or c) perform necessary repair at the equipment's location.  
In the event that RAD requests the return of equipment, each party shall pay one-way shipping costs.  
RAD shall be released from all obligations under its warranty in the event that the equipment has been  
subjected to misuse, neglect, accident or improper installation, or if repairs or modifications were  
made by persons other than RAD's own authorized service personnel, unless such repairs by others  
were made with the written consent of RAD.  
The above warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied. There are no warranties  
which extend beyond the face hereof, including, but not limited to, warranties of merchantability and  
fitness for a particular purpose, and in no event shall RAD be liable for consequential damages.  
RAD shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect damages, including, but not limited to,  
lost profits from any cause whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the manufacture,  
sale, handling, repair, maintenance or use of the FCD-IPM, and in no event shall RAD's liability exceed  
the purchase price of the FCD-IPM.  
DISTRIBUTOR shall be responsible to its customers for any and all warranties which it makes relating  
to FCD-IPM and for ensuring that replacements and other adjustments required in connection with the  
said warranties are satisfactory.  
Software components in the FCD-IPM are provided "as is" and without warranty of any kind. RAD  
disclaims all warranties including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular  
purpose. RAD shall not be liable for any loss of use, interruption of business or indirect, special,  
incidental or consequential damages of any kind. In spite of the above RAD shall do its best to provide  
error-free software products and shall offer free Software updates during the warranty period under  
this Agreement.  
RAD's cumulative liability to you or any other party for any loss or damages resulting from any claims,  
demands, or actions arising out of or relating to this Agreement and the FCD-IPM shall not exceed the  
sum paid to RAD for the purchase of the FCD-IPM. In no event shall RAD be liable for any indirect,  
incidental, consequential, special, or exemplary damages or lost profits, even if RAD has been advised of  
the possibility of such damages.  
This Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with the laws of the State of Israel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Safety Instructions  
The following instructions serve as a general guide for the safe installation and operation of  
telecommunications products. Additional instructions, if applicable, are included inside the manual.  
Safety Symbols  
This symbol may appear on the equipment or in the text. It indicates  
potential safety hazards regarding product operation or maintenance to  
operator or service personnel.  
Warning  
Danger of electric shock! Avoid any contact with the marked surface while  
the product is energized or connected to outdoor telecommunication lines.  
.
Protective earth: the marked lug or terminal should be connected to the building  
protective earth bus.  
Some products may be equipped with a laser diode. In such cases, a label  
with the laser class and other warnings as applicable will be attached near  
the optical transmitter. The laser warning symbol may be also attached.  
Warning  
Please observe the following precautions:  
• Before turning on the equipment, make sure that the fiber optic cable is  
intact and is connected to the transmitter.  
• Do not attempt to adjust the laser drive current.  
• Do not use broken or unterminated fiber-optic cables/connectors or look  
straight at the laser beam.  
• The use of optical devices with the equipment will increase eye hazard.  
• Use of controls, adjustments or performing procedures other than those  
specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
ATTENTION: The laser beam may be invisible!  
Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation and maintenance of this  
product. Only qualified and authorized service personnel should carry out adjustment, maintenance or  
repairs to this product. No installation, adjustment, maintenance or repairs should be performed by  
either the operator or the user.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling Energized Products  
General Safety Practices  
Do not touch or tamper with the power supply when the power cord is connected. Line voltages may  
be present inside certain products even when the power switch (if installed) is in the OFF position or a  
fuse is blown. For DC-powered products, although the voltages levels are usually not hazardous,  
energy hazards may still exist.  
Before working on equipment connected to power lines or telecommunication lines, remove jewelry  
or any other metallic object that may come into contact with energized parts.  
Unless otherwise specified, all products are intended to be grounded during normal use. Grounding is  
provided by connecting the mains plug to a wall socket with a protective earth terminal. If an earth lug  
is provided on the product, it should be connected to the protective earth at all times, by a wire with a  
diameter of 18 AWG or wider. Rack-mounted equipment should be mounted only in earthed racks  
and cabinets.  
Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last. Do not connect telecommunication  
cables to ungrounded equipment. Make sure that all other cables are disconnected before  
disconnecting the ground.  
Connection of AC Mains  
Make sure that the electrical installation complies with local codes.  
Always connect the AC plug to a wall socket with a protective ground.  
The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power to  
the product is 16A. The circuit breaker in the building installation should have high breaking capacity  
and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A.  
Always connect the power cord first to the equipment and then to the wall socket. If a power switch is  
provided in the equipment, set it to the OFF position. If the power cord cannot be readily  
disconnected in case of emergency, make sure that a readily accessible circuit breaker or emergency  
switch is installed in the building installation.  
Connection of DC Mains  
Unless otherwise specified in the manual, the DC input to the equipment is floating in reference to the  
ground. Any single pole can be externally grounded.  
Due to the high current capability of DC mains systems, care should be taken when connecting the DC  
supply to avoid short-circuits and fire hazards.  
DC units should be installed in a restricted access area, i.e. an area where access is authorized only to  
qualified service and maintenance personnel.  
Make sure that the DC supply is electrically isolated from any AC source and that the installation  
complies with the local codes.  
The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power to  
the product is 16A. The circuit breaker in the building installation should have high breaking capacity  
and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A.  
Before connecting the DC supply wires, ensure that power is removed form the DC circuit. Locate the  
circuit breaker of the panel board that services the equipment and switch it to the OFF position. When  
connecting the DC supply wires, first connect the ground wire to the corresponding terminal, then the  
positive pole and last the negative pole. Switch the circuit breaker back to the ON position.  
A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably rated and approved should be incorporated in  
the building installation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connection of Data and Telecommunications Cables  
Data and telecommunication interfaces are classified according to their safety status.  
The following table lists the status of several standard interfaces. If the status of a given port differs from  
the standard one, a notice will be given in the manual.  
Ports  
Safety Status  
V.11, V.28, V.35, V.36, RS-530,  
X.21, 10 BaseT, 100 BaseT,  
Unbalanced E1, E2, E3, STM, DS-2,  
DS-3, S-Interface ISDN, Analog voice  
E&M  
SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage:  
Ports which do not present a safety hazard. Usually  
up to 30 VAC or 60 VDC.  
xDSL (without feeding voltage),  
Balanced E1, T1, Sub E1/T1  
TNV-1 Telecommunication Network Voltage-1:  
Ports whose normal operating voltage is within the  
limits of SELV, on which overvoltages from  
telecommunications networks are possible.  
FXS (Foreign Exchange Subscriber)  
TNV-2 Telecommunication Network Voltage-2:  
Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the  
limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone  
ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from  
telecommunication networks are not possible. These  
ports are not permitted to be directly connected to  
external telephone and data lines.  
FXO (Foreign Exchange Office), xDSL TNV-3 Telecommunication Network Voltage-3:  
(with feeding voltage), U-Interface  
Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the  
ISDN  
limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone  
ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from  
telecommunication networks are possible.  
Always connect a given port to a port of the same safety status. If in doubt, seek the assistance of a  
qualified safety engineer.  
Always make sure that the equipment is grounded before connecting telecommunication cables. Do  
not disconnect the ground connection before disconnecting all telecommunications cables.  
Some SELV and non-SELV circuits use the same connectors. Use caution when connecting cables.  
Extra caution should be exercised during thunderstorms.  
When using shielded or coaxial cables, verify that there is a good ground connection at both ends. The  
earthing and bonding of the ground connections should comply with the local codes.  
The telecommunication wiring in the building may be damaged or present a fire hazard in case of  
contact between exposed external wires and the AC power lines. In order to reduce the risk, there are  
restrictions on the diameter of wires in the telecom cables, between the equipment and the mating  
connectors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caution  
To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cords.  
Attention  
Pour réduire les risques s’incendie, utiliser seulement des conducteurs de  
télécommunications 26 AWG ou de section supérieure.  
Some ports are suitable for connection to intra-building or non-exposed wiring or cabling only. In such  
cases, a notice will be given in the installation instructions.  
Do not attempt to tamper with any carrier-provided equipment or connection hardware.  
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)  
The equipment is designed and approved to comply with the electromagnetic regulations of major  
regulatory bodies. The following instructions may enhance the performance of the equipment and will  
provide better protection against excessive emission and better immunity against disturbances.  
A good earth connection is essential. When installing the equipment in a rack, make sure to remove all  
traces of paint from the mounting points. Use suitable lock-washers and torque. If an external  
grounding lug is provided, connect it to the earth bus using braided wire as short as possible.  
The equipment is designed to comply with EMC requirements when connecting it with unshielded  
twisted pair (UTP) cables. However, the use of shielded wires is always recommended, especially for  
high-rate data. In some cases, when unshielded wires are used, ferrite cores should be installed on  
certain cables. In such cases, special instructions are provided in the manual.  
Disconnect all wires which are not in permanent use, such as cables used for one-time configuration.  
The compliance of the equipment with the regulations for conducted emission on the data lines is  
dependent on the cable quality. The emission is tested for UTP with 80 dB longitudinal conversion loss  
(LCL).  
Unless otherwise specified or described in the manual, TNV-1 and TNV-3 ports provide secondary  
protection against surges on the data lines. Primary protectors should be provided in the building  
installation.  
The equipment is designed to provide adequate protection against electro-static discharge (ESD).  
However, it is good working practice to use caution when connecting cables terminated with plastic  
connectors (without a grounded metal hood, such as flat cables) to sensitive data lines. Before  
connecting such cables, discharge yourself by touching earth ground or wear an ESD preventive wrist  
strap.  
FCC-15 User Information  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of the Class A digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This  
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the Installation and Operation manual, may cause harmful interference to the radio  
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful  
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Canadian Emission Requirements  
This Class A digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing  
Equipment Regulation.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel  
brouilleur du Canada.  
Warning per EN 55022 (CISPR-22)  
Warning  
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause  
radio interference, in which case the user will be required to take adequate  
measures.  
Cet appareil est un appareil de Classe A. Dans un environnement résidentiel, cet  
appareil peut provoquer des brouillages radioélectriques. Dans ces cas, il peut  
être demandé à l’utilisateur de prendre les mesures appropriées.  
Avertissement  
Achtung  
Dieses ist ein Gerät der Funkstörgrenzwertklasse A. In Wohnbereichen können  
bei Betrieb dieses Gerätes Rundfunkströrungen auftreten, in welchen Fällen der  
Benutzer für entsprechende Gegenmaßnahmen verantwortlich ist.  
Conventions  
Note  
A note draws attention to a general rule for a procedure, or to exceptions to a rule.  
A caution warns of possible damage to the equipment if a procedure is not  
followed correctly.  
Caution  
A warning alerts to the presence of important operating and maintenance  
(servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the equipment. If these  
instructions are not followed exactly, possible bodily injury may occur.  
Warning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Start Guide  
If you are familiar with FCD-IPM, use this guide to prepare it for operation.  
1. Installing and Operating FCD-IPM  
ꢀ
To install FCD-IPM:  
1. Unpack the unit.  
2. If working with E1 unbalanced interface, open the unit to switch factory setting  
of jumper from BAL to UNBAL.  
3. Close the unit.  
4. Connect interface cables to the unit.  
5. Connect the power to the unit.  
6. Turn on the unit.  
7. Configure the unit using the Quick Setup Menu or Advanced Menu.  
Installing and Operating FCD-IPM  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Start Guide  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
2
Installing and Operating FCD-IPM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
1.1 Overview.......................................................................................................... 1-1  
Versions...................................................................................................................1-1  
Applications.............................................................................................................1-3  
Features...................................................................................................................1-4  
1.2 Physical Description.......................................................................................... 1-5  
1.3 Functional Description...................................................................................... 1-5  
Main Link and Sublink Characteristics ......................................................................1-6  
IO Data Channel Interfaces......................................................................................1-7  
System Timing Considerations..................................................................................1-7  
Time Slot Handling..................................................................................................1-8  
Integrated Router.....................................................................................................1-8  
Bridging...................................................................................................................1-8  
Protocols .................................................................................................................1-9  
Management ...........................................................................................................1-9  
1.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................. 1-11  
Chapter 2. Installation and Setup  
2.1 Site Requirements & Prerequisites..................................................................... 2-1  
2.2 Package Contents.............................................................................................. 2-2  
2.3 Equipment Needed........................................................................................... 2-2  
2.4 Installation and Setup........................................................................................ 2-2  
Setting Internal Jumpers and Switches ......................................................................2-2  
Fuses .......................................................................................................................2-3  
2.5 Interfaces and Connections ............................................................................... 2-4  
E1/T1 Link Connections ...........................................................................................2-4  
IO Data Channel Connections .................................................................................2-4  
Control Port Connection..........................................................................................2-5  
Connecting the Power .............................................................................................2-5  
Chapter 3. Operation  
3.1 Introduction...................................................................................................... 3-1  
3.2 Indicators.......................................................................................................... 3-1  
Front Panel Indicators ..............................................................................................3-1  
Rear Panel Indicators ...............................................................................................3-3  
3.3 Operating Instructions....................................................................................... 3-3  
Turning On..............................................................................................................3-3  
Normal Indications ..................................................................................................3-3  
Fault Indications ......................................................................................................3-5  
Turning Off..............................................................................................................3-5  
3.4 Connecting to the ASCII Terminal ..................................................................... 3-5  
Connecting the Terminal Emulator...........................................................................3-5  
Password Protection.................................................................................................3-6  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Chapter 4. Configuration  
4.1 Overview.......................................................................................................... 4-1  
4.2 Main Menu....................................................................................................... 4-2  
4.3 Quick Setup Menu............................................................................................ 4-2  
Quick Setup Parameters...........................................................................................4-3  
Quick Setup Menu Examples ...................................................................................4-5  
WAN Settings ..........................................................................................................4-7  
LAN Settings............................................................................................................4-9  
ISDN Settings.........................................................................................................4-11  
Frame Relay Settings..............................................................................................4-11  
DLCI Number........................................................................................................4-11  
V.24 Async Settings................................................................................................4-12  
Security Settings.....................................................................................................4-12  
4.4 Security Setup Menu....................................................................................... 4-13  
Device Access Restriction.......................................................................................4-14  
Firewall Option......................................................................................................4-15  
IP Address Translation (NAT)..................................................................................4-18  
4.5 Advanced Setup Menu.................................................................................... 4-20  
Setup Menu...........................................................................................................4-20  
Device Control Menu ............................................................................................4-21  
4.6 View Menu ..................................................................................................... 4-26  
Configuration.........................................................................................................4-27  
Interface Connections............................................................................................4-29  
Routing Tables.......................................................................................................4-29  
Statistics.................................................................................................................4-35  
SHDSL Status and Statistics ....................................................................................4-35  
E1/T1 Diagnostics ..................................................................................................4-38  
E1/T1 Alarms Log File.............................................................................................4-40  
4.7 Diagnostic Tools Menu.................................................................................... 4-41  
Chapter 5. Setup Menu  
5.1 Host Parameters Menu...................................................................................... 5-3  
Device ID................................................................................................................5-4  
IP Host ....................................................................................................................5-5  
SNMP Manager Table..............................................................................................5-7  
TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) ..........................................................................5-8  
RADIUS (Authentication and Billing) ........................................................................5-9  
5.2 Routing/Bridging Menu ................................................................................... 5-11  
Interface Routing/Bridging Mode............................................................................5-12  
Static Stations and Nets..........................................................................................5-15  
IP Routings Settings................................................................................................5-17  
IPX Routing Settings...............................................................................................5-25  
Station Ageing........................................................................................................5-27  
5.3 Interface Parameters Menu ............................................................................. 5-28  
Link Settings Menu ................................................................................................5-29  
SHDSL Settings......................................................................................................5-31  
E1/T1 Settings........................................................................................................5-34  
ISDN Settings Menu...............................................................................................5-67  
Frame Relay Settings..............................................................................................5-70  
ii  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
5.4 Access Control (Security) Menu....................................................................... 5-75  
External Access Security (only relevant to Link with PPP Protocol)...........................5-76  
Device Security Identity (PPP only).........................................................................5-78  
Security Host/Guest (PPP only)...............................................................................5-79  
Login Script Setup..................................................................................................5-79  
5.5 WAN Economy Menu..................................................................................... 5-82  
Filters ....................................................................................................................5-83  
Connection on Demand ........................................................................................5-92  
Spoofing................................................................................................................5-97  
5.6 Factory Default Options.................................................................................. 5-99  
Chapter 6. Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
6.1 General Troubleshooting................................................................................... 6-1  
6.2 E1/T1 and Voice Troubleshooting...................................................................... 6-1  
6.3 Router Connections Troubleshooting ................................................................ 6-2  
IP connection to LAN is DOWN ..............................................................................6-2  
IP Connection to WAN is DOWN............................................................................6-2  
Appendix A. Interface Specifications and Cable Diagrams  
Appendix B. Boot Manager  
Appendix C. SNMP Management  
Appendix D. Glossary  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
List of Figures  
1-1. FCD-IPM with PBX and LAN ..................................................................................... 1-3  
1-2. FCD-IPM with Eight Telephones and LAN over SHDSL.............................................. 1-3  
1-3. FCD-IPM General View............................................................................................. 1-5  
1-4. FCD-IPM Functional Block Diagram.......................................................................... 1-6  
2-1. Location of Internal BAL/UNBAL Jumpers.................................................................. 2-3  
2-2. FCD-IPM Rear Panel ................................................................................................. 2-4  
3-1. FCD-IPM Front Panel ................................................................................................ 3-1  
3-2. Connecting to Terminal Emulator .............................................................................. 3-6  
4-1. FCD-IPM Main Menu................................................................................................ 4-2  
4-2. T1 Interface Quick Setup Screen ............................................................................... 4-5  
4-3. E1 Interface Quick Setup Screen ............................................................................... 4-6  
4-4. Setting up the IP Mask............................................................................................. 4-10  
4-5. Security Setup Menu Outline .................................................................................. 4-13  
4-6. Security Setup Menu ............................................................................................... 4-13  
4-7. Configuring Firewalls ............................................................................................... 4-17  
4-8. Firewall Setup Menu ............................................................................................... 4-17  
4-9. Firewall Interfaces Menu ......................................................................................... 4-17  
4-10. Firewall Rules Menu.............................................................................................. 4-18  
4-11. IP Address Translation Menu ................................................................................. 4-18  
4-12. IP Address Translation ........................................................................................... 4-18  
4-13. IP Address Transparent.......................................................................................... 4-19  
4-14. Advanced Menu Outline....................................................................................... 4-20  
4-15. Advanced Menu.................................................................................................... 4-20  
4-16. Device Control Menu Outline ............................................................................... 4-21  
4-17. Device Control Menu............................................................................................ 4-21  
4-18. Software Download Menu..................................................................................... 4-22  
4-19. Using the Dual Image Flash ...................................................................................4-22  
4-20. Downloading from a TFTP Server.......................................................................... 4-23  
4-21. Software Download Menu..................................................................................... 4-23  
4-22. Downloading/Uploading Parameters ..................................................................... 4-24  
4-23. View Menu Outline............................................................................................... 4-26  
4-24. View Menu ........................................................................................................... 4-27  
4-25. View Configuration Screen.................................................................................... 4-28  
4-26. Interface Connections Screen................................................................................ 4-29  
4-27. Routing Tables Menu............................................................................................. 4-29  
4-28. Bridge Table.......................................................................................................... 4-30  
4-29. IP Interfaces Table................................................................................................. 4-30  
4-30. IP Routing Table.................................................................................................... 4-30  
4-31. IPX Routing Table..................................................................................................4-31  
4-32. IPX Services Table ................................................................................................. 4-32  
4-33. ARP Table .............................................................................................................4-32  
4-34. IP Address Pool (DHCP) Table............................................................................... 4-33  
4-35. OSPF Related Information Menu........................................................................... 4-33  
4-36. OSPF Interfaces Table ........................................................................................... 4-33  
iv  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
4-37. OSPF Neighbors Table .......................................................................................... 4-34  
4-38. OSPF Database Table............................................................................................ 4-34  
4-39. LAN Statistics......................................................................................................... 4-35  
4-40. SHDSL Status ........................................................................................................ 4-36  
4-41. SHDSL Statistics over Intervals............................................................................... 4-37  
4-42. T1 Diagnostics....................................................................................................... 4-38  
4-43. E1 Diagnostics....................................................................................................... 4-38  
4-44. E1 Alarms Screen................................................................................................... 4-40  
4-45. T1 Alarms Screen .................................................................................................. 4-40  
4-46. Diagnostic Tools Menu Outline ............................................................................. 4-41  
4-47. Diagnostic Tools Menu.......................................................................................... 4-41  
4-48. Pinging an IP Host.................................................................................................4-41  
4-49. Ping Terminal Screen............................................................................................. 4-42  
5-1. Setup Menu Outline.................................................................................................. 5-1  
5-2. Setup Menu .............................................................................................................. 5-1  
5-3. Host Parameters Menu Outline ................................................................................. 5-3  
5-4. Host Parameters Menu.............................................................................................. 5-4  
5-5. Device ID Menu........................................................................................................ 5-4  
5-6. IP Host Menu............................................................................................................ 5-5  
5-7. Default Gateway ....................................................................................................... 5-7  
5-8. SNMP Manager Table Menu ..................................................................................... 5-7  
5-9. TFTP Menu ............................................................................................................... 5-8  
5-10. File Transfer to and from TFTP Server...................................................................... 5-8  
5-11. RADIUS Menu ........................................................................................................ 5-9  
5-12. Routing Menu Outline........................................................................................... 5-11  
5-13. Routing/Bridging menu.......................................................................................... 5-12  
5-14. Interface Routing Bridging Mode Menu................................................................. 5-12  
5-15. Adding Static Stations and Nets ............................................................................. 5-15  
5-16. Router 2 set to “Next Hop” in FCD-IPM................................................................ 5-16  
5-17. IP Routing Settings................................................................................................. 5-17  
5-18. WAN and LAN Interface Addresses ....................................................................... 5-18  
5-19. IP Address Pool Menu ........................................................................................... 5-20  
5-20. PC Remote Access................................................................................................. 5-21  
5-21. OSPF Settings Menu.............................................................................................. 5-22  
5-22. Interfaces area ID .................................................................................................. 5-23  
5-23. Interfaces area ID .................................................................................................. 5-23  
5-24. OSPF Areas Setup ................................................................................................. 5-23  
5-25. OSPF Summaries Setup......................................................................................... 5-24  
5-26. IPX Routing Settings............................................................................................... 5-25  
5-27. Automatic Learning from IPX Frames..................................................................... 5-26  
5-28. RIP/SAP Mode Setup............................................................................................. 5-26  
5-29. Station Aging Menu............................................................................................... 5-27  
5-30. Interface Parameters Menu Outline....................................................................... 5-28  
5-31. Interface Parameters.............................................................................................. 5-29  
5-32. Link Settings Menu................................................................................................ 5-29  
5-33. SHDSL Settings Menu ........................................................................................... 5-31  
5-34. SHDSL Parameters Menu ...................................................................................... 5-32  
5-35. SHDSL Loops Menu.............................................................................................. 5-33  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
5-36. Local Loopback..................................................................................................... 5-34  
5-37. Remote Loopback ................................................................................................. 5-34  
5-38. FCD-IPM with an E1/T1 Interface.......................................................................... 5-35  
5-39. FCD-IPM with an E1/T1 Interface and Sublink....................................................... 5-35  
5-40. FCD-IPM with an E1/T1 Interface and Analog Voice Ports ..................................... 5-35  
5-41. T1 Setup Menu ..................................................................................................... 5-37  
5-42. T1 Time Slots Mapping Screen .............................................................................. 5-39  
5-43. Time Slots Mapping (for FCD-IPM with a T1 Sublink) ............................................ 5-39  
5-44. Remote Analog Loopback...................................................................................... 5-40  
5-45. Remote Analog Loopback for T1 and Sub T1 Links................................................ 5-41  
5-46. Remote Digital Loopback ...................................................................................... 5-41  
5-47. Remote Digital Loopback for T1 and Sub T1 Links ................................................ 5-41  
5-48. Local Analog Loopback ......................................................................................... 5-42  
5-49. Local Analog Loopback for T1 and Sub T1 Links.................................................... 5-42  
5-50. T1 Parameters Link1 Menu.................................................................................... 5-43  
5-51. FXS Voice Interface ............................................................................................... 5-45  
5-52. FXO Voice Interface .............................................................................................. 5-47  
5-53. E & M Voice Interface ........................................................................................... 5-49  
5-54. T1 Time Slots Mapping Link1 Screen..................................................................... 5-51  
5-55. T1 Alarms Filter Menu........................................................................................... 5-52  
5-56. E1 Setup Menu...................................................................................................... 5-53  
5-57. E1 Time Slots Mapping Screen .............................................................................. 5-55  
5-58. Time Slots Mapping (for FCD-IPM with an E1 Sublink) .......................................... 5-55  
5-59. Remote Analog Loopback...................................................................................... 5-56  
5-60. Remote Analog Loopback for E1 and Sub E1 Links ................................................ 5-57  
5-61. Local Analog Loopback ......................................................................................... 5-57  
5-62. Local Analog Loopback for E1 and Sub E1 Links.................................................... 5-58  
5-63. E1 Parameters ....................................................................................................... 5-58  
5-64. FXS Voice Parameters............................................................................................ 5-60  
5-65. FXO Voice Interface .............................................................................................. 5-62  
5-66. E & M Voice Interface ........................................................................................... 5-64  
5-67. E1 Time Slots Mapping Link1 Screen..................................................................... 5-66  
5-68. E1 Alarms Filter Screen.......................................................................................... 5-67  
5-69. Connection to the Internet over ISDN ................................................................... 5-68  
5-70. Dialback Phone Number....................................................................................... 5-69  
5-71. Frame Relay DLCI Settings..................................................................................... 5-70  
5-72. Connection to the Internet over Frame Relay ........................................................ 5-70  
5-73. Frame Relay Options in the Advanced Menu......................................................... 5-71  
5-74. Polling Intervals ..................................................................................................... 5-73  
5-75. Monitored Events .................................................................................................. 5-73  
5-76. Monitored Events - Down Link.............................................................................. 5-73  
5-77. Access Control Menu Outline................................................................................ 5-75  
5-78. Access Control Menu ............................................................................................ 5-76  
5-79. External Access Security Menu .............................................................................. 5-76  
5-80. Device Security Identity Menu .............................................................................. 5-78  
5-81. Security Host/Guest Menu..................................................................................... 5-79  
5-82. Script Setup Menu................................................................................................. 5-79  
5-83. WAN Economy Menu Outline............................................................................... 5-82  
5-84. WAN Economy Menu ........................................................................................... 5-83  
vi  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
5-85. Filters Menu ..........................................................................................................5-83  
5-86. Action of a Quick Filter ......................................................................................... 5-84  
5-87. Action of an Advanced Filter ................................................................................. 5-85  
5-88. Filters Menu ..........................................................................................................5-86  
5-89. Quick Filters Menu................................................................................................ 5-87  
5-90. Add Filters Menu................................................................................................... 5-88  
5-91. Connection On Demand Menu............................................................................. 5-92  
5-92. Permanent Connection ......................................................................................... 5-94  
5-93. Any Frame Starts a Connection.............................................................................. 5-95  
5-94. Limiting Access to a Specific PC............................................................................. 5-96  
5-95. Manual Connection............................................................................................... 5-97  
5-96. IP/IPX Spoofing Menu............................................................................................ 5-97  
5-97. Factory Default Menu Outline............................................................................... 5-99  
List of Tables  
1-1. Typical FCD-IPM Ranges over SHDSL Link................................................................ 1-7  
3-1. Front Panel Indicator Functions ................................................................................. 3-2  
3-2. Rear Panel Indicator Functions .................................................................................. 3-3  
4-1. Quick Setup Parameters............................................................................................ 4-4  
4-2. WAN Parameters....................................................................................................... 4-7  
4-3. LAN Parameters ........................................................................................................ 4-9  
4-4. ISDN Settings .......................................................................................................... 4-11  
4-5. V.24 Async Settings ................................................................................................. 4-12  
4-6. Security Settings ...................................................................................................... 4-12  
4-7. IP Address Translation (NAT) Settings....................................................................... 4-19  
4-8. SHDSL Status Screen Parameters............................................................................. 4-36  
4-9. SHDSL Statistics Parameters .................................................................................... 4-37  
4-10. Interval Parameters................................................................................................ 4-39  
5-1. Device ID Parameters................................................................................................ 5-5  
5-2. IP Host Parameters.................................................................................................... 5-6  
5-3. TFTP Parameters ....................................................................................................... 5-8  
5-4. RADIUS Menu Parameters ...................................................................................... 5-10  
5-5. Interface Routing/Bridging Mode Menu Parameters................................................. 5-13  
5-6. PPP Settings............................................................................................................. 5-14  
5-7. Static Stations and Nets ........................................................................................... 5-15  
5-8. Routing Protocol Settings......................................................................................... 5-18  
5-9. IP Address Pool Setting (DHCP)............................................................................... 5-19  
5-10. IP Address Pool Settings......................................................................................... 5-21  
5-11. OSPF Settings........................................................................................................ 5-22  
5-12. OSPF Areas Setup ................................................................................................. 5-24  
5-13. IPX Routing Settings............................................................................................... 5-25  
5-14. Link Settings.......................................................................................................... 5-30  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
5-15. SHDSL Parameters ................................................................................................ 5-32  
5-16. SHDSL Loops ........................................................................................................ 5-33  
5-17. T1 Setup Parameters ............................................................................................. 5-37  
5-18. T1 Parameters Link1 Parameters............................................................................ 5-43  
5-19. E1 Setup Parameters.............................................................................................. 5-53  
5-20. E1 Link1 Parameters.............................................................................................. 5-59  
5-21. Dialing Mode Parameters ...................................................................................... 5-68  
5-22. Answering Mode Parameters ................................................................................. 5-68  
5-23. Local Number for Dialback ................................................................................... 5-69  
5-24. Frame Relay Link Parameters................................................................................. 5-72  
5-25. Frame Relay DLCI Parameters ............................................................................... 5-74  
5-26. External Access Security Parameters....................................................................... 5-77  
5-27. Device Security Identity......................................................................................... 5-78  
5-28. Command Codes .................................................................................................. 5-80  
5-29. Example of Argument............................................................................................ 5-81  
5-30. Add Filters Menu Terms ........................................................................................ 5-89  
5-31. Advanced Filter Parameters ................................................................................... 5-89  
5-32. Connection On Demand Parameters..................................................................... 5-93  
5-33. IP/IPX Spoofing Parameters.................................................................................... 5-98  
6-1. General Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 6-1  
6-2. E1, T1 and Voice Troubleshooting............................................................................. 6-1  
6-3. Router Connections Troubleshooting......................................................................... 6-2  
6-4. IP Connection to WAN Troubleshooting.................................................................... 6-2  
viii  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Introduction  
1.1 Overview  
FCD-IPM is an E1/T1 or fractional E1/T1 Integrated Access Device (IAD), which  
enables service providers to bundle voice and Internet access services over a single  
E1 or T1 access line. FCD-IPM connects an Ethernet LAN to the Internet or  
Intranet through the integrated IP/IPX router or bridge. The connection is made via  
E1/T1/SHDSL links, operating at data rates of up to 2.048 Mbps for E1,  
1.544 Mbps for T1 or 2.048 Mbps for SHDSL with optional backup for data using  
ISDN or PSTN networks. WAN data protocols supported are Frame Relay, PPP  
and MLPPP. FCD-IPM also supports two Ethernet LAN connections and provides  
two IO data channel slot options.  
FCD-IPM provides transparent data and voice capabilities over the E1 or T1 access  
line, such as a synchronous data channel that supports user-selectable transmission  
rates, digital voice over sub E1 or T1 link that supports PBX and analog FXS, FXO  
and E&M voice ports.  
Versions  
There are several versions of FCD-IPM, and each version has its own specific  
options.  
The following options are available for ordering as part of FCD-IPM:  
•
Main Wan Interface  
ꢀ E1/T1 Interface (main link only)  
ꢀ E1 over SHDSL (main link only)  
ꢀ Sub-E1/T1, analog voice, and ISDN backup interface options:  
ꢀ S: supports sub-E1/T1  
ꢀ FXS: supports 4 FXS voice channels  
ꢀ FXO: supports 4 FXO voice channels  
ꢀ E&M: supports 4 E&M voice channels  
ꢀ IBE: supports ISDN “S” interface  
ꢀ IBU: supports ISDN “U” interface.  
•
WAN interface options (up to two data ports):  
ꢀ T1 or fractional T1 CSU/DSU operating at up to 1.544 Mbps  
ꢀ E1 or fractional E1, with or without LTU, operating at up to 2.048 Mbps  
Overview  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1 Introduction  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
ꢀ E1/T1 over fiber optic links with interfaces:  
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
850 nm LED for use over multimode fiber at distances up to 5 km (3 miles)  
1310 nm LED for use over single mode fiber at distances up to 47 km (29 miles)  
1310 nm laser diode for use over single mode fiber at distances up to 62 km  
(38 miles)  
ꢁ
1550 nm laser diode for use over single mode fiber for extended range  
up to 100 km (62 miles)  
ꢁ
ST, FC/PC, or SC connectors.  
ꢀ Interfaces/connectors for WAN:  
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
V.35 with 34-pin female via adapter cable  
V.24/RS-232 or RS-530 with 25 pin D-type, female  
X.21 with 15-pin D-type, female via adapter cable  
V.36/RS-422 with 37-pin D-type, female via adapter cable.  
•
LAN interface options:  
ꢀ One or two ports  
ꢀ Port types:  
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
LAN 1 – 10/100BaseT with RJ-45 connector (UTP) or 10Base2 with coax  
connector (BNC)  
LAN 2 – 10BaseT with RJ-45 connector (UTP), 10Base2 with coax  
connector (BNC).  
4-port Ethernet/Fast Ethernet switch.  
•
I/O data channel slot options:  
ꢀ I/O1 upper slot  
ꢀ I/O2 lower slot  
ꢀ Card insertion options:  
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
4 analog voice ports (quad FXS or FXO or E&M)  
8 analog voice ports (2 × quad FXS or FXO or E&M)  
Sub E1/T1  
2 × Sub E1/T1 cards  
4 analog voice ports + Nx64K cards  
Sub E1/T1 + Nx64K cards  
Nx64K cards (V.24, V.35 or V.11)  
5 Port Ethernet 10/100 Switch  
1-2  
Overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 1 Introduction  
The second WAN option is not available when configuring E1/T1 with an ISDN backup.  
The dual LAN configuration is not available when configuring E1/T1 with an ISDN  
backup.  
Note  
Applications  
FCD-IPM is the solution for several different applications. Order your unit  
according to your specific application requirements. FCD-IPM can be used as a  
router for the office LAN to access the Internet/Intranet and at the same time  
control access from the local PBX to the E1/T1 line. FCD-IPM can also have up to  
twelve telephones connected directly to the unit for those applications where a  
PBX is not present. The following is a list of application options for  
FCD-IPM:  
•
FCD-IPM with PBX and LAN - In the application shown in Figure 1-1,  
FCD-IPM supports a single LAN connection to the Internet/Intranet and voice  
connectivity to the PSTN.  
VOICE  
LAN  
LAN  
Figure 1-1. FCD-IPM with PBX and LAN  
•
FCD-IPM with four Telephones and LAN – In the application shown in  
Figure 1-2, FCD-IPM supports four individual telephones connected to the  
carrier, and a LAN connection to the Internet/Intranet.  
PABX/PBX  
x4  
x4  
FXS  
FXS  
VOICE  
LAN  
Figure 1-2. FCD-IPM with Eight Telephones and LAN over SHDSL  
Overview  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1 Introduction  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Features  
E1/T1 Main Link  
•
•
•
•
•
•
E1/T1 Integrated Access Device (IAD) for Internet/Intranet and voice connectivity  
E1 over 2-wire SHDSL link optional  
Integral E1 with or without LTU or Integral T1 CSU/DSU  
Optional sub-E1/T1 drop and insert port for PABX connectivity  
Fail-safe bypass for the sub-E1/T1 link  
Optional fiber optic uplink.  
Integrated Router  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IP and IPX routing and standard bridging  
Supports Frame Relay, PPP and MLPPP  
One or two Ethernet ports or one Fast Ethernet port  
Optional dial-up or integrated ISDN backup  
PAP/CHAP authentication  
Solid Firewall protection  
NAT and Single IP address translation  
DHCP server and relay  
OSPF Protocol  
Quick setup and configuration  
In-band and out-of-band remote management  
SNMP and Telnet support  
Dual management authorization levels (carrier/user)  
FLASH memory for software and parameter file downloading  
Remote software and parameter file download.  
Ethernet/Fast Ethernet Switch  
•
Built-in 4-port switch with 1Mb buffer with Auto-polarity and auto-negotiation.  
Data  
•
Optional second data port (transparent n x 64/56 or serial router port).  
Voice  
•
•
•
Supports twelve analog voice channels  
PCM encoded, A-Law or µ-Law  
Optional interfaces: 2-wire FXS, 2-wire FXO, or 4-wire or 2-wire E&M.  
1-4  
Overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 1 Introduction  
1.2 Physical Description  
FCD-IPM units are delivered completely assembled. The units are designed for  
desktop installation, or to be mounted in a 19-inch rack. Installation procedures  
for FCD-IPM models and respective versions are provided in Chapter 2.  
Figure 1-3 shows a 3-D diagram of FCD-IPM.  
Figure 1-3. FCD-IPM General View  
Controls and indicators of the various versions of FCD-IPM and their functions are  
described in Chapter 3. The LED indicators on the front panel indicate the  
operating status of FCD-IPM. Various indicators display status of user’s data port,  
status of data activity in user’s data connector, and alert conditions. For a  
description of the front panel, refer to Chapter 3.  
The power and interface connectors are located on the rear panel of FCD-IPM.  
For a description of the rear panel, refer to Chapter 2.  
The internal jumpers of FCD-IPM are set according to options ordered. The only  
jumper that you may need to set is the BAL/UNBAL jumper. The factory setting for  
this jumper is BAL. For more information about setting jumpers, refer to Chapter 2.  
1.3 Functional Description  
This section describes the main and sublink characteristics, the data and voice  
channel interfaces, timing considerations, time slot handling, integrated IP router  
and management of FCD-IPM. Figure 1-4 shows a functional block diagram for  
FCD-IPM.  
Functional Description  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1 Introduction  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Main  
Link  
Voice  
n x 64 kbps  
Port  
Sublink  
Mux  
LAN 1  
LAN 2  
ISDN or  
Serial  
Port  
Router  
Switch  
Figure 1-4. FCD-IPM Functional Block Diagram  
FCD-IPM can be ordered in several configuration options. The main link is always  
E1/T1 (E1 over SHDSL), and there is always at least one LAN link. The other  
interfaces may be a sub E1/T1 link, analog voice, ISDN backup, n x 64 data port,  
or router port.  
Main Link and Sublink Characteristics  
The FCD-IPM E1 main and sublink meet the requirements of ITU-T Rec. G.703,  
G.704, G.706, G.732, and G.823, and support 256N and 256S multiframes  
(2 or 16 frames per multiframe, respectively), in accordance with ITU-T Rec.  
G.704. For FCD-IPM T1 versions the main and sublink comply to AT&T TR62411  
and ANSI T1.403 standards, and support D4 and ESF framing.  
The framed mode and use of the CRC-4 function are user-selectable.  
1-6  
Functional Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 1 Introduction  
The main and sublinks have two line interfaces:  
•
120Ω balanced line interface, terminated in an RJ-48C eight-pin (ISO 10173)  
connector  
•
•
75Ω unbalanced interface, terminated in two BNC coaxial connectors  
T1 versions have a 100Ω balanced interface.  
You can select the E1 interface to activate the LTU option. With the T1 version,  
you can choose to activate CSU or DSU.  
When a power failure occurs, the failsafe bypass of the sub E1/T1 link ensures the  
continuity of voice services between the main and the fix sublink.  
Note  
The fail-safe bypass of the E1/T1 sub-link is not available for the FCD-IPM units  
equipped with SHDSL interface.  
E1 over SHDSL  
E1 traffic can also be transmitted using 2-wire SHDSL physical interface. The  
SHDSL link uses TC-PAM technology and complies with the requirements of the  
ITU-T G.991.2 standard. Table 1-1 lists typical FCD-IPM ranges over 2-wire  
24 AWG line.  
Table 1-1. Typical FCD-IPM Ranges over SHDSL Link  
Data Rate  
2-wire, 24 AWG (0.5 mm)  
kbps  
km  
6.5  
5.8  
5.1  
4.8  
4.1  
3.5  
3.2  
miles  
192  
4.0  
3.6  
3.1  
2.9  
2.5  
2.1  
1.9  
384  
512  
768  
1024  
1152  
2048  
IO Data Channel Interfaces  
Each of the two IO data channels can be operated as n x 64k or n x 56k data port  
(DCE only).  
System Timing Considerations  
Internally, FCD-IPM uses one system timing source (clock). This system clock  
determines the transit timing of all the E1 links and data ports. The clock source  
options are as follows:  
•
•
•
Main link 1  
Sublink (each of them)  
Internal.  
Functional Description  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1 Introduction  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Time Slot Handling  
FCD-IPM allows the user to configure each of the individual time slots freely  
according to the following options:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Data link1 – for data from router/bridge  
FIX SUB Voice – for voice from sublink  
FIX SUB Data – for data from sublink  
FIX Voice (1, 2, 3, 4) – for analog voice port 1, 2, 3, 4  
I/O1 Voice (1, 2, 3, 4) – for analog voice port 1, 2, 3, 4  
I/O2 Voice (1, 2, 3, 4) – for analog voice port 1, 2, 3, 4  
I/O1 SUB Data – for data from sublink  
I/O2 SUB Data – for data from sublink  
I/O1 SUB Voice – for voice from sublink  
I/O2 SUB Voice – for voice from sublink  
I/O1 Channel – for n x 64/56 data port  
I/O2 Channel – for n x 64/56 data port.  
For more information on configuring time slots, refer to Chapter 4.  
Integrated Router  
IP Router  
FCD-IPM as an IP router supports:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Static IP net configuration  
Dynamic IP net learning using RIP and RIP-2 protocols  
CIDR topologies  
Multiple IP nets on the LAN  
Numbered and unnumbered interfaces  
IP fragmentation  
RIP1, RIP2 & OSPF Routing Protocols.  
IPX Router  
FCD-IPM also supports standard IPX routing that includes support for RIP and SAP.  
Bridging  
FCD-IPM supports bridging. The bridge is used to interconnect a number of LANs  
by accessing layer 2 (MAC layer). FCD-IPM automatically extends the scope of any  
interface, allowing the interface to interconnect several networks, providing that all  
supported interfaces are set to bridge mode.  
1-8  
Functional Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 1 Introduction  
FCD-IPM interconnects:  
•
•
•
Any LAN to link  
Two LANs of the same Bridge  
Two LANs and link.  
FCD-IPM interconnects all of its interfaces to one extended LAN.  
FCD-IPM supports standard bridging, as specified in IEEE 802.1D, and can operate  
opposite any other third party bridge. Spanning Tree Algorithm is not supported.  
Bridging works over PPP, Frame Relay RFC-1490 and also a ‘Native’ protocol.  
MAC frames pass in an HDLC format.  
Protocols  
FCD-IPM supports:  
•
PPP (Point to Point Protocol) – this protocol supports a variety of links and  
connection options  
•
Frame Relay – a network interface, which provides high-speed frame or packet  
transmission with minimum delay and maximum bandwidth utilization.  
Management  
FCD-IPM features a variety of inband and out-of-band management options. These  
options include dedicated time slot, dedicated DLCI, and dial-in connectivity.  
You can manage the following capabilities:  
•
•
•
•
FCD-IPM configuration  
Viewing FCD-IPM status  
Testing FCD-IPM  
Viewing alarm status and history.  
The management functions are performed via:  
•
•
•
SNMP management – enables management using the RADview or any other  
standard SNMP-based management systems.  
Telnet – enables a remote IP host to control the operation of FCD-IPM using  
functions identical to those provided by a supervision terminal.  
Supervision terminal – an ASCII terminal connected to the RS-232 control port  
of FCD-IPM (or a PC running a terminal emulation program) can be used as a  
supervision terminal.  
Undesired access to FCD-IPM via Telnet or SNMP can be blocked by the firewall,  
or password protected. The dual-level management authentication allows access to  
router configuration parameters while restricting the access to network  
configuration parameters.  
Functional Description  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1 Introduction  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Software download is available via the control port using XMODEM and via  
LAN/WAN using TFTP. Parameter file download and upload is available via LAN or  
WAN using TFTP.  
FCD-IPM has an alarm history memory that holds the up to 100 alarms.  
Management Using Dedicated Time Slot (DTS)  
FCD-IPM features out-of-band management through a dedicated time slot.  
The DTS is a management channel that connects directly to the FCD-IPM host  
using a separate IP interface, i.e. address, and operates as an additional WAN  
interface connected to the management IP network.  
This management channel is totally separated from the IP traffic that the integrated  
router forwards, so there is no way to expose the manager IP network to  
unauthorized IP users.  
The DTS channel should be synchronized with other equipment such as a cross  
connect unit or router. This can be done with standard WAN protocols such as  
Frame Relay and PPP.  
1-10  
Functional Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 1 Introduction  
1.4 Technical Specifications  
Framing Options  
256N (no MF, CCS)  
E1 Link Interface  
256N (no MF, CCS) with CRC-4  
256S (TS16 MF, CAS)  
256S (TS16 MF, CAS) with CRC-4  
2.048 Mbps  
Bit Rate  
Line Code  
AMI  
Zero Suppression  
Line Impedance  
HDB3  
Balanced interface: 120Ω  
Unbalanced interface: 75Ω  
Receive level:  
Signal Levels  
• FCD-IPM with LTU: 0 to –30 dB  
• FCD-IPM without LTU: 0 to –12 dB  
Transmit level:  
• Balanced interface: ±3V ±10%  
• Unbalanced interface: ±2.37V ±10%  
As per ITU-T Rec. G.823  
Balanced interface: RJ-48c 8-pin connector  
Jitter Performance  
Connectors  
Unbalanced interface: Two BNC coaxial  
connectors  
Compliance  
ITU G.703, G.704, G.706, G.732  
Diagnostics  
User activated local and remote loopbacks  
Framing Options  
D4  
T1 Link Interface  
ESF  
Bit Rate  
1.544 Mbps  
AMI  
Line Code  
Zero Suppression  
Transparent  
B7ZS  
B8ZS  
Impedance  
Balanced: 100Ω  
Technical Specifications  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1 Introduction  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Signal Level  
Receive level:  
• FCD-IPM with CSU: 0 to –36 dB  
• FCD-IPM without CSU: 0 to –10 dB  
Transmit level:  
• FCD-IPM with CSU: 0, -7.5, -15,  
-22.5 dB  
• FCD-IPM without CSU: soft adjustable at  
0 to 655 ft.  
Jitter Performance  
Connectors  
As per AT&T TR-62411  
Balanced interface: RJ-48c 8-pin connector  
Unbalanced interface: two BNC coaxial  
connectors  
Compliance  
Diagnostics  
AT&T TR62411, ANSI T1.403  
User available local and remote loopbacks  
Network activated loops and FDL loops  
(RLB, LLB)  
Type  
2-wire unconditioned dedicated line  
SHDSL Interface  
Line Coding  
Range  
TC-PAM  
See Table 1-1  
135Ω  
Impedance  
Connector  
Protection  
RJ-45  
ITU K.21, UL1950  
4 per card  
Number of Voice  
Channels  
Analog Voice  
Modulation Method  
PCM (per ITU-T G.711 and AT&T  
PUB-43801)  
µ-Law or A-Law  
Interfaces  
E&M: 2-wire or 4-wire, supporting different  
types of E&M signaling: RS-464 Types I, II,  
III, and V, and BT SSDC5, configured by  
software  
FXS: Loop start, WINK start (reverse polarity)  
for direct connection to a 2-wire telephone  
1-12  
Technical Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 1 Introduction  
FXO: Loop start, WINK start (reverse polarity)  
for connection to a 2-wire telephone  
exchange subscriber line  
Nominal level: 0 dBm  
Nominal impedance: 600Ω  
Return loss (ERL): Better than 18 dB  
Frequency response: (Ref: 1020 Hz)  
• ±0.5 dB, 300 to 3000 Hz  
• ±1.1 dB, 250 to 3400 Hz  
Signal to total distortion, G.712, G.713  
method 2:  
• 0 to –30 dBm0, better than 33 dB  
• +3 to –45 dBm0, better than 22 dB  
Idle channel noise: Better than –70 dBm0  
(+20 dBrnc)  
Transformer isolation: 1500 VRMS  
Diagnostics  
Remote analog loopback towards the remote  
side, activated from local side  
1kHz tone injection towards analog side  
Activity indicators  
Interfaces  
ISDN BRI, “S” and “U”  
ISDN  
Compliance  
ETS 300012  
I.430  
NT1  
5ESS  
DMS-100  
NI1  
Types  
Types  
Frame Relay – RFC 1490  
WAN Protocols  
Routing  
PPP and MLPPP  
STATIC  
RIP-1  
RIP-2  
RIP/SAP  
OSPF  
Technical Specifications  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Introduction  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Number of Ports  
Standards  
Types  
1 or 2  
LAN Interface  
Conforms to Ethernet/IEEE 802.3  
10Base2 with BNC coax connector  
10BaseT with RJ-45 connector  
10/100 BaseT  
Interface  
Internal Ethernet/Fast  
Ethernet Switch  
Number of Ports  
Four  
Interfaces/Connectors V.35 with 34-pin female via adapter cable  
Data Port Interfaces  
V.24/RS-232 or RS-530 with 25-pin D-type  
female  
X.21 with 15-pin D-type female via adapter  
cable  
V.36/RS-422 with 37-pin D-type female via  
adapter cable  
Interface Options  
850 nm LED  
Fiber Optic Interfaces  
1300 nm LED  
1300 nm laser diode  
1550 nm laser diode  
ST  
Connectors  
Compliance  
FC/PC  
SC  
ITU G.921, G.956  
Power indicator (green)  
Ready (green)  
Indicators  
LINK (green)  
100M (green)  
LINK data (yellow)  
LINK error (red)  
RED alarm (red – T1 only)  
YEL alarm (yellow – T1 only)  
LOC sync loss indicator (red – E1 only)  
REM sync loss indicator (red – E1 only)  
1-14  
Technical Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 1 Introduction  
General  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
Weight  
4.37 cm/1.7 in (1U)  
44.0 cm/17.3 in  
Physical  
23.53 cm/9.25 in  
5 kg/11 lb  
RM-34 (for 19-inch Rack)  
Installation Kit  
Power  
Supply voltage  
100–240 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz, 25 VA max  
24/48 VDC  
Power consumption  
Temperature  
12W  
0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)  
Up to 90%, non-condensing  
Environment  
Humidity  
Technical Specifications  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Introduction  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
1-16  
Technical Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Installation and Setup  
This chapter provides instructions for mechanical and electrical installation of the  
FCD-IPM unit.  
After installation, you must configure the unit before further operation. Refer to  
Chapter 4 for basic and advanced configuration instructions. In case a problem is  
encountered, refer to Chapter 5 for test and diagnostics instructions.  
No internal settings, adjustment, maintenance, and repairs may be performed  
by either the operator or the user; such activities may be performed only by a  
skilled technician who is aware of the hazards involved. Always observe  
standard safety precautions during installation, operation, and maintenance of  
this product.  
Warning  
2.1 Site Requirements & Prerequisites  
Install AC powered FCD-IPM units within 1.5m (5 feet) of an easily accessible,  
grounded AC outlet capable of furnishing the nominal supply voltage, 115 or  
230 VAC. DC powered units require a 24 or -48 VDC power source.  
Allow at least 90 cm (36 inches) of frontal clearance for operator access. Allow at  
least 10 cm (4 inches) clearance at the rear for interface cable connections. The  
ambient operating temperature of FCD-IPM is 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F), at a  
relative humidity of up to 90%, non-condensing.  
Note  
The FCD-IP units are cooled by free air convection therefore in rack installation it is  
necessary to leave sufficient space (at least 1U) above and below each unit to  
enable free airflow.  
Site Requirements & Prerequisites  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
2.2 Package Contents  
Inspect the equipment package before unpacking. Note and report damage  
immediately. The FCD-IPM package includes the following items:  
•
•
•
•
•
FCD-IPM unit  
Multiservice Access Devices and Intelligent CLEs CD  
CBL-RJ45/D9/F/6FT configuration cable  
Interface adapter cable in accordance with your order  
AC power cable or DC power connection kit.  
2.3 Equipment Needed  
The cables you need depend on the application. Cables terminated in appropriate  
connectors provide support for the following data port interfaces:  
•
•
V.35 interface: the interface adapter cable ends in a 34-pin female connector  
V.36/422 interface: the interface adapter cable ends in a 37-pin D-type  
female connector  
•
•
V.24/RS-232 or RS-530 interface: the interface adapter cable ends in a 25-pin  
D-type female connector  
X.21 interface: the interface adapter cable ends in a 15 pin D-type female  
connector.  
2.4 Installation and Setup  
The FCD-IPM units are delivered completely assembled. The units are designed  
for desktop installation.  
For installation of FCD-IPM in a 19-inch rack, the RM-34 rack mount kit is  
available. For rack installation instructions, refer to the Rack Mounting Kit for  
19-inch Racks guide that comes with the RM kit.  
Installation procedures for FCD-IPM are provided in the following paragraphs.  
Setting Internal Jumpers and Switches  
Only the BAL/UNBAL jumpers, whose locations are shown in Figure 2-1, are  
meant for user adjustment. All other internal jumpers are factory set according to  
the specific ordering requirements and are not designed for user access. The  
factory setting for the BAL/UNBAL jumpers is BAL. Before setting these jumpers,  
open the FCD-IPM case.  
2-2  
Installation and Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup  
NO  
FOR FLOATING  
RX PATH  
YES  
RX-G  
FOR  
NON FLOATING  
RX PATH  
J4  
J3  
For E1 and T1 Interfaces - JUMPER J4  
NO  
J1  
Factory Setting: YES  
YES  
J8  
Factory Setting: NO  
Figure 2-1. Location of Internal BAL/UNBAL Jumpers  
Fuses  
The AC version of FCD-IPM has a user-replaceable fuse rated at 1A slow blow.  
The fuse is accessible by opening the fuse cover located just above the power  
connector on the rear panel.  
Caution  
Replace fuses only with fuses having identical ratings.  
Installation and Setup  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
2.5 Interfaces and Connections  
Figure 2-2 shows a general diagram of the rear panels of AC-powered and  
DC-powered FCD-IPM units, and identifies the different optional connector  
locations.  
P
O
W
E
Sub Link  
Location  
Power  
Connector  
IO Data Channel  
R
Main Link Location  
IO Data Channel  
Data Port  
Options  
Options  
Options  
Options Options  
Options  
Options  
LAN 1  
10/100BaseT  
Blank  
V.24  
V.35  
X.21  
V.36  
Rs530  
Blank  
E1  
T1  
FXS  
FXO  
E&M  
ISDN “U”  
ISDN “S”  
AC  
DC  
E1  
T1  
SHDSL  
Blank  
E1  
T1  
Blank  
E1  
T1  
FXS  
FXO  
E&M  
VXX  
:
10Base2  
FXS  
FXO  
E&M  
VXX  
LAN 2  
:
Blank  
10BaseT  
10Base2  
Ethernet Switch Ethernet Switch  
4-port Ethernet/  
Fast Ethernet Switch  
Figure 2-2. FCD-IPM Rear Panel  
E1/T1 Link Connections  
FCD-IPM E1/T1 link has a RJ-48c eight-pin connector for the balanced HDB3  
interface, and two BNC connectors for the unbalanced HDB3 interface.  
Appendix A provides the pin allocation for the RJ-48c connector.  
Connect the E1/T1 link cables to the connector(s) corresponding to the interface in  
use.  
Caution  
Do not connect to both the balanced and unbalanced connectors!  
When using the balanced interface, connect to the RJ-45 connector.  
When using the unbalanced interface, connect to the two BNC connectors  
designated TX/Out and RX/In. Make sure the receive and transmit cables are  
connected to the TX/Out and RX/In connectors properly.  
IO Data Channel Connections  
The FCD-IPM user data port has several possible interface connectors. A listing of  
the connectors is given in Equipment Needed on page 2-2.  
Connect the DTE link cable to the user data port connector. For more information  
on pin allocation, refer to Appendix A.  
2-4  
Interfaces and Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup  
Control Port Connection  
The FCD-IPM control port is located on the front panel. Connect the ASCII  
terminal to this port. For more information on connecting to the control port, refer  
to Connecting to the ASCII Terminal in Chapter 3.  
Connecting the Power  
For your protection, FCD-IPM must always be grounded. Any interruption of the  
protective (grounding) conductor (inside or outside the instrument) or  
disconnecting the protective earth terminal can make this instrument dangerous.  
Intentional interruption is prohibited.  
BEFORE POWERING UP AN AC POWERED FCD-IPM, the protective earth  
terminals of this instrument must be connected to the protective conductor of  
the (mains) power cord. The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket  
outlet provided with a protective ground (earth) contact. The protective action  
must not be negated by use of an extension cord (power cable) without a  
protective conductor (grounding).  
Warning  
Make sure that only fuses with the required rated current and of the specified  
type, as marked on the FCD-IPM rear panel, are used for replacement. Use of  
repaired fuses and short-circuiting of fuse holders is forbidden.  
Whenever it is likely that the protection offered by fuses has been impaired,  
the instrument must be made inoperative and be secured against any  
unintended operation.  
AC Power Connection  
AC power should be supplied to FCD-IPM through the 1.5m (5 feet) standard  
power cable terminated by a standard 3-prong plug.  
ꢀ
To connect the AC power:  
1. Check that the ON/OFF switch on the FCD-IPM rear panel is set to OFF.  
2. Connect the power cable to the connector on the FCD-IPM rear panel.  
3. Connect the power cable to the mains outlet.  
DC Power Connection  
ꢀ
To connect the DC power:  
1. Check that the ON/OFF switch on the FCD-IPM rear panel is set to OFF.  
2. Connect the power cable to the DC power connector.  
Constraints  
Do not hot swap the FCD-IPM modular IO data channel cards. A card must be  
added to or removed from an IO slot when the power is off ONLY.  
Warning  
Interfaces and Connections  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
2-6  
Interfaces and Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
Operation  
In this chapter you will find detailed operating instructions for FCD-IPM. It  
includes:  
•
•
•
•
Description of indicators  
Operating procedures (turn-on, front-panel indications, and turn-off)  
Connection to ASCII terminal  
Login.  
Refer to Chapter 6 for diagnostic and troubleshooting instructions.  
3.1 Introduction  
FCD-IPM is designed for unattended operation. After initial power-up, and prior to  
use, you must configure a basic set-up for FCD-IPM. For more information about  
configuration, refer to Chapter 4.  
3.2 Indicators  
Front Panel Indicators  
Figure 3-1 shows the location of front panel indicators for one of the various  
FCD-IPM versions.  
Figure 3-1. FCD-IPM Front Panel  
Table 3-1 lists the functions of the controls and indicators located on the front  
panel of FCD-IPM.  
Indicators  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Operation  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Table 3-1. Front Panel Indicator Functions  
Object  
Description  
Function  
POWER  
Green LED  
ON when FCD-IPM is powered on.  
ON when packets can be transferred.  
Blinks – a loopback is active on E1, T1 or SHDSL link  
READY/LOOP Green LED  
LAN 1 DATA  
LAN 2 DATA  
Yellow LED  
Red LED  
ON when a packet is received or transmitted on the  
LAN side.  
LAN 1 ERR  
LAN 2 ERR  
ON when a LAN interface indicates an error.  
LINK 1 DATA  
LINK 2 DATA  
Yellow LED  
Red LED  
Turns ON briefly when a packet is received or  
transmitted on the LINK side.  
LINK1 ERR  
LINK2 ERR  
OFF when there is a physical connection and no LINK  
interface error.  
Turns ON briefly when LINK interface indicates an  
error.  
Continuously ON when there is no physical connection.  
LINK1 RED  
ALARM  
Red LED  
ON when T1 link is in RED ALARM.  
Local unit lost frame synchronization for more than  
2.5 consecutive seconds.  
SUB RED  
ALARM  
Red LED  
ON when one of the T1 sub link is in RED ALARM.  
Sub link of the local unit lost frame synchronization for  
more than 2.5 consecutive seconds.  
LINK1  
YELLOW  
ALARM  
Yellow LED  
ON when one of the T1 sub link is in YELLOW ALARM.  
Yellow alarm signal is sent from Remote Unit to inform  
the local unit that a RED ALARM exists at the remote  
end.  
SUB YELLOW Yellow LED  
ALARM  
ON when one of the T1 sub link is in YELLOW ALARM.  
Yellow alarm signal is sent from Remote Unit to inform  
the sub link of the local unit that a RED ALARM exists at  
the remote end.  
LINK1 LOC  
SYNC LOSS  
Red LED  
Red LED  
ON when E1 link is in local sync loss alarm.  
Local unit lost frame synchronization for more than 2.5  
consecutive seconds.  
SUB LOC  
SYNC LOSS  
ON when one of the E1 sub link is in local sync loss  
alarm.  
Sub link of the local unit lost frame synchronization for  
more than 2.5 consecutive seconds.  
3-2  
Indicators  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 3 Operation  
Table 3-1. Front Panel Indicator Functions (Cont.)  
Object  
Description  
Function  
LINK1 REM  
SYNC LOSS  
Red LED  
ON when E1 link is in remote sync loss alarm.  
Remote sync loss signal is sent from Remote Unit to  
inform the local unit that a sync loss exists at the remote  
end.  
SUB REM  
SYNC LOSS  
Red LED  
ON when one of the E1 sub link is in remote sync loss  
alarm.  
Remote sync loss signal is sent from Remote Unit to  
inform the sub link of the local unit that a sync loss  
exists at the remote end.  
Rear Panel Indicators  
Table 3-2. Rear Panel Indicator Functions  
Object  
Description  
Green LED  
Function  
LINK  
ON – LAN is connected to LAN1 or LAN2 connector or  
to one of the Ethernet/Fast Ethernet switch ports.  
100M  
Green LED  
ON – LAN speed is 100M  
OFF – LAN speed is 10M  
3.3 Operating Instructions  
Turning On  
In order for the unit to function, you must provide FCD-IPM with a setup  
configuration. You configure the unit after the initial power-up stage.  
ꢀ
To turn on FCD-IPM:  
•
Set the power switch on the rear panel to ON.  
FCD-IPM performs a self-test. All the FCD-IPM indicators should light up.  
Confirm that all are operating. Following the test, all indicators except PWR  
and READY turn off.  
FCD-IPM is now ready for configuration. Refer to Chapter 4, for quick setup and  
advanced configuration instructions.  
Normal Indications  
During normal operation the POWER indicator lights up, and the READY indicator  
lights up when packets can be transferred. Additional indications are:  
•
The LAN DATA indicator lights when a packet is received or transmitted on  
the LAN side  
Operating Instructions  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Operation  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
•
The LINK DATA indicator lights when a packet is received or transmitted on  
the LINK side.  
3-4  
Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 3 Operation  
Fault Indications  
If a fault occurs, the following alarm indicators light up, and data transfer may be  
interrupted:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
LAN ERR indicator lights when LAN interface indicates an error  
LINK ERR indicator lights when LINK interface indicates an error  
RED ALARM indicator lights when T1 interface detects red alarm  
YELLOW ALARM indicator lights when T1 interface detects yellow alarm  
LOC SYNC LOSS indicator lights when the E1 interface detects local sync loss  
REM SYNC LOSS indicator lights when the E1 interface detects remote sync  
loss.  
To obtain additional information, observe the state of the other indicators and  
then refer to Chapter 6 for troubleshooting information:  
Turning Off  
Set the FCD-IPM power switch, on the rear panel of the unit, to OFF.  
3.4 Connecting to the ASCII Terminal  
FCD-IPM features a setup program that is invoked and run from an ASCII terminal  
or a PC emulator. The terminal/terminal emulator is connected to the RJ-45  
CONTROL port on the FCD-IPM front panel (see Figure 3-2).  
Connecting the Terminal Emulator  
ꢀ
To connect the terminal emulator:  
1. Attach the cable to the RS-232 port on the PC.  
2. Attach the other end of the cable to the CONTROL port on the FCD-IPM front  
panel.  
Connecting to the ASCII Terminal  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 Operation  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Figure 3-2. Connecting to Terminal Emulator  
To setup the terminal:  
ꢀ
1. Set the terminal to work at a baud rate of 9.6 kbps, No Parity, 8 Data Bits.  
2. Set the hardware control to OFF.  
3. Switch on FCD-IPM.  
The operational screen is displayed.  
ꢀ
To initiate the login message:  
•
Press <Enter> several times.  
Password Protection  
Using a password prevents unauthorized personnel from changing configuration  
parameters.  
Before you can access any configuration menus you will be prompted for login.  
ꢀ
To logon:  
•
Enter the correct password. The factory default password is 1234.  
The password can be changed or removed during configuration. For more  
information, refer to Chapter 4.  
Notes  
1. Use of Password protection for the configuration module is recommended.  
Always use the Exit option in the Main Menu once the unit has been  
configured. Using the Exit option will force personnel requiring access to the  
configuration module to use password.  
2. Password verification is case sensitive. Once the password is set, use the same  
case that you used when typing in the password.  
3. To enable E1/T1 parameter configuration the supervisor password must be  
used. Using the login password disables E1/T1 menu viewing.  
3-6  
Connecting to the ASCII Terminal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
Configuration  
Topics covered in this chapter include:  
•
•
•
•
•
Overview of configuration menus  
Main menu  
Quick setup menu  
Security menu  
Advanced setup menu  
ꢀ Download software/upload device parameters  
View menu  
•
•
Diagnostic tools menu.  
4.1 Overview  
The Main Menu has the following options:  
•
Quick setup menu – The Quick Setup menu is used to define the basic  
parameters for your FCD-IPM unit. The Quick Setup menu allows you to  
adjust setup and link configuration parameters while FCD-IPM is in operation.  
Line-by-line prompts guide you throughout the procedure. On-screen  
instructions and explanations guide you through the setup procedure. For a  
complete description of the Quick Setup menu refer to Section 4.3.  
•
•
Security setup menu – Use the options in the Security Setup menu to control  
FCD-IPM management and entry to your LAN by unauthorized users (refer to  
Section 4.4).  
Advanced setup menu – The Advanced menu lists FCD-IPM configuration  
parameters and their current values. You can change these parameters and  
perform advanced configuration operations, not available through the Quick  
Setup menu. Resetting the device and software downloads are also performed  
via the Advanced Menu (refer to Section 4.5).  
•
•
View menu – Use the options in the View menu to view configuration screens  
and information on interface connections, routing tables and statistics.  
Diagnostic Tools menu – Use the Diagnostic Tools menu to verify WAN and  
LAN connectivity. The Ping feature allows you to request another user on the  
LAN or WAN. If the remote user replies, connectivity is confirmed up to and  
including the IP level.  
Overview  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
•
Exit – Select this option to return to the Operational Status Messages screen. In  
this mode you can view real-time information about the unit’s activities.  
4.2 Main Menu  
Figure 4-1 shows the Main Menu options.  
The name of the device connected to the terminal (FCD-IPM) is listed at the top of  
the screen.  
ꢀ
To choose an option from the Main Menu:  
Type the number preceding the option.  
MAIN MENU (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
----------  
1. Quick setup  
2. Security setup  
3. Advanced setup  
4. View  
5. Diagnostic tools  
0. Exit  
Press number to select or ESC to return to the previous menu  
Figure 4-1. FCD-IPM Main Menu  
4.3 Quick Setup Menu  
The parameters listed on the Quick Setup Menu include most of FCD-IPM's  
internetworking features:  
•
•
•
•
•
WAN Interface  
IP Parameters  
Physical connections  
Protocol  
Routing type.  
The Quick Setup screen presents messages that prompt you to accept or modify  
the current parameters. The parameter options are enclosed in brackets [ ].  
ꢀ
ꢀ
To access the Quick Setup Menu:  
1. In the Main menu, press 1.  
The Quick Setup menu appears, showing the first parameter, Link Status.  
To accept the current parameter:  
•
Press <Enter>.  
4-2  
Quick Setup Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
ꢀ
To view the options:  
•
Toggle with the space bar and press ENTER.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
To enter new information:  
1. Type in the new parameters.  
2. Press <Enter>.  
To change the existing value:  
•
Press <Backspace>.  
After all parameters have been accepted or changed, you can view them on the  
screen. A confirmation message appears requesting that you confirm all the setup  
changes. The device may reset after saving these changes.  
ꢀ
To configure the setup parameters:  
1. From the Main Menu, select option 1, Quick Setup.  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to accept or modify the setup parameters.  
3. Press Y to save the setup parameters.  
Quick Setup Parameters  
The Quick Setup menu contains both general parameters and those parameters  
specific to the interfaces installed. This section organizes the parameters into  
various categories. The screen for each interface and a description of the options  
in the Quick Setup menu can be found in the sections that follow. Refer to the  
section that applies to the interface you ordered.  
Quick Setup Menu  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Table 4-1. Quick Setup Parameters  
Parameters  
WAN Parameters  
Type  
Options  
Link status  
Link mode  
Routing  
General  
Protocol  
WAN IP Address (for IP Router  
only)  
WAN IP Mask (for IP Router only).  
E1/T1 Configuration  
DCLI number  
E1/T1  
Frame Relay  
ISDN  
Protocol (ISDN)  
Bandwidth  
Connection Type  
Channel A – Destination Phone No.  
Channel B – Destination Phone No.  
Connection.  
V24 Async  
General  
Modem Type  
Baud Rate  
LAN Parameters  
LAN Status  
LAN IP Address  
LAN IP Mask  
Default Gateway  
Default Gateway Interface  
Routing  
Security  
Device Access Name  
Parameters  
Password  
Security Type  
The Quick Setup Menu varies according to the options of FCD-IPM that you have  
ordered. The following pages illustrate some of the Quick Setup menus that are  
available.  
The fields in the Quick Setup screens are described below.  
4-4  
Quick Setup Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
Quick Setup Menu Examples  
The following pages illustrate some of the Quick Setup menus, dependent upon  
the interface that has been ordered.  
Quick Setup for T1 (PPP, IP)  
Figure 4-2 shows the Quick Setup menu for T1.  
QUICK SETUP  
-----------  
WARNING: This device automatically exits to Operational  
Messages 10 minutes after last keyboard action without  
saving parameters  
'ENTER' - Accept parameter , 'SPACE' - Change parameter.  
WAN interface Link 1 - T1  
Link status  
Link mode  
: [Enable]  
: [Synchronous]  
Routing  
: [IP ROUTER], Protocol: [PPP]  
: 10.0.0.1, enter new : 10.0.0.1  
: 255.255.255.252, enter new: 255.255.255.252  
WAN IP address  
WAN IP mask  
Do you want to configure the T1 Interface parameters (Y/N)?:  
Host IP setup:  
LAN Status  
: [Enable]  
LAN IP address  
LAN IP mask  
: 192.168.1.1, enter new : 192.168.1.1  
: 255.255.255.000, enter new : 255.255.255.000  
Default gateway setting by: [Interface]  
Default gateway interface: 1  
SECURITY Setup  
Device access name : FCD-IPM  
No password at present – do you want to create password (Y/N)?: [N]  
Security type  
: [Disabled]  
Saving the changes might cause RESET the unit.  
Do you want to save QUICK SETUP (Y/N)? Y  
Figure 4-2. T1 Interface Quick Setup Screen  
Quick Setup Menu  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Quick Setup for E1 (PPP, IP) + ISDN (Backup, 128K, PPP, IP)  
Figure 4-3 shows the Quick Setup menu for E1.  
QUICK SETUP  
-----------  
WARNING: This device automatically exits to Operational  
Messages 10 minutes after last keyboard action without  
saving parameters  
'ENTER' - Accept parameter , 'SPACE' - Change parameter.  
WAN interface Link 1 - E1  
Link status  
Link mode  
: [Enable]  
: [Synchronous]  
Routing  
: [IP ROUTER], Protocol: [PPP]  
: 10.0.0.1, enter new : 10.0.0.1  
: 255.255.255.252, enter new: 255.255.255.252  
WAN IP address  
WAN IP mask  
Do you want to configure the E1 Interface parameters (Y/N)?:  
WAN interface Link 2/CH1 – BRI  
Link status  
Routing  
: [Backup] to interface: [LINK 1]  
: [IP ROUTER], Protocol: [PPP]  
: 0.0.0.0, enter new : 0.0.0.  
: [ETSI]  
WAN IP address  
Protocol  
Bandwidth  
: [128]  
Connection Type  
: [Originate only]  
Channel A – Destination phone number: 1234  
Channel B – Destination phone number: 5678  
Connection  
Host IP setup:  
LAN Status  
: [Always]  
: [Enable]  
LAN IP address : 192.168.1.1, enter new : 192.168.1.1  
LAN IP mask : 255.255.255.000, enter new : 255.255.255.000  
Default gateway setting by: [Interface]  
Default gateway interface: [LINK 1]  
SECURITY Setup  
Device access name : FCD-IPM  
No password at present – do you want to create password (Y/N)?: [N]  
Security type: [Disabled]  
Saving the changes might cause the unit to RESET.  
Do you want to save QUICK SETUP (Y/N) ? N  
Figure 4-3. E1 Interface Quick Setup Screen  
4-6  
Quick Setup Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
WAN Settings  
Set this parameter for the WAN configuration.  
Table 4-2. WAN Parameters  
Description  
Transmits and receives frames.  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Enable  
Link Status  
Disable  
Does not transmit or receive frames. The link may be permanently disabled, for  
example, when testing. A disabled line freezes all link operation, including  
connection attempts and forwarding.  
Backup  
If a link is defined as backup to another, then whenever the main link operates  
normally, the backup link is disabled. If the main link fails, the backup link begins  
to operate and become enabled. You must make sure that the routing settings are  
correct so that traffic will be forwarded to the desired destination via the backup  
link. When you restore the main link connection, the backup link becomes  
disabled again.  
Default : Enable  
Link Mode  
Routing  
Synchronous  
Data bits are transmitted at a fixed rate. The sender and the receiver are  
synchronized  
Frame Relay  
A packet-switching protocol for connecting devices on a WAN.  
Asynchronous  
Data bits are transmitted at a fixed rate. The sender and the receiver are not  
synchronized.  
IP, IPX, Bridge  
Assigns the link forwarding type.  
Any combination  
of these link  
types.  
Quick Setup Menu  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Table 4-2. WAN Parameters  
Description  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Protocol  
PPP  
Point to Point Protocol. PPP consists of 3 components:  
Encapsulation method – for IP datagrams on a serial link PPP supports HDLC  
synchronous links.  
LCP – Link control procedure to establish, configure, and test the data-link  
connection. Having an LCP allows each end to negotiate various options.  
NCP(s) – A family of network control protocols specific to different network layer  
protocols. The NCPs allow each end to configure network control parameters.  
PPP is often used across slow serial lines. It is therefore important to reduce the  
number of bytes per frame in order to reduce the latency time. Using LCP, most  
implementations negotiate to omitting the constant address and control fields and  
reducing the size of the protocol fields from 2 bytes to 1 byte. In addition, when  
using IP NCP, most implementations use Van Jacobson header compression to  
reduce the size of IP and TCP headers.  
RFC-1490  
Encapsulation method for carrying network interconnect traffic over a Frame  
Relay backbone. RFC-1490 also supports a simple fragmentation procedure for  
carrying large frames over a frame relay network with a smaller MTU.  
DLCI – Every network interface card (NIC) has a Data Link Communication  
Identifier (DLCI) that uniquely identifies the node on the network. DLCI enables  
connection to the Frame Relay network without configuring Frame Relay  
parameters.  
DLCI executes congestion control when an explicit congestion notification is  
received for the DLCI from the Frame Relay network. The unit reduces the  
transmitted information rate of the DLCI and increases it when the congestion  
condition is cleared.  
Default : PPP  
DLCI Number  
Sets the DLCI identification number.  
4-8  
Quick Setup Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
LAN Settings  
Set the parameters in this section for each LAN connection.  
Table 4-3. LAN Parameters  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Enable  
Description  
LAN Status  
Transmits and receives frames  
Disable  
Does not transmit or receive frames. Used by system  
administrator  
Default : Enable  
Routing  
Select this parameter to set the routing option.  
Note: This parameter appears for the 2-LAN device only.  
LAN IP Address  
Class A  
1.0.0.0 to  
Select this parameter to enter the IP address. Every device on  
a TCP/IP network must have an identification address. The IP  
127.255.255.255, address is a value consisting of the network address and the  
host address on that network. The value assigned to a  
network depends on the number of computers on that  
network.  
Class B  
128.0.0.0 to  
191.255.255.255,  
The IP address is a 32-bit number. The number consists of 4  
Class C  
192.0.0.0 to  
223.255.255.255,  
parts, where each part consists of 3 digits. One part of the  
address identifies the network and another part of the  
address identifies the host. The numbers in the address,  
which identifies the host, depend on the class.  
There are 5 classes of IP addresses. Each class represents a  
network having a certain number of computers. For example,  
a Class C address is given to a network having between 1 to  
255 computers.  
The numbers in each part of the code are translated into  
binary. The binary code identifies the network and the host.  
IP addresses are assigned by the Internet Network  
Information Center (InterNIC). InterNIC assigns the network  
ID. Host IDs are assigned by the network administrator.  
Class D  
224.0.0.0 to  
239.255.255.255  
Class E  
240.0.0.0 to  
247.255.255.255  
LAN IP Mask  
Select this parameter to enter the IP mask. The mask is  
configured automatically from the IP address class. If you want  
to change the default mask, enter a new mask. For example,  
the IP mask is usually 225.225.225.0. A mask like this would  
allow 254 hosts on the LAN. If you want to create a subnet,  
which allows 6 users, including FCD-IPM, configure the mask  
as 225.225.225.248. on FCD-IPM, as well as each host  
included on the subnet (refer to Figure 4-4).  
Quick Setup Menu  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Table 4-3. LAN Parameters (Cont.)  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
Default Gateway  
Setting  
Select this parameter to set the Default Gateway configuration  
(see Figure 4-4). The default gateway is the address to which  
frames are sent, if no other address is defined in the routing  
table.  
The default gateway can be an IP address or a WAN interface.  
If you choose to use an IP address, enter the address of the  
router, which will deliver the frames. Specifying an IP address  
for the default gateway is done with shared media, such as LAN  
interface. If you choose to use a WAN interface, the connection  
to the router is point-to-point. Choose by interface and enter  
interface/DLCI number (for Frame Relay).  
Warning: It is very important to obtain the correct parameters  
from the system administrator or ISP. The most common  
problem when establishing an IP connection is incorrect  
configuration of the IP parameters and Default Gateway. Do not  
try to guess these parameters.  
E1/T1 Settings  
Prompts to perform advanced configuration on the main link  
settings – E1 or T1, depending on your unit. By entering YES  
you are sent into the Advanced Configuration menu. For more  
information, refer to Chapter 5.  
FCD-IPM  
LAN IP address 192.168.1.1  
Mask  
255.255.255.248  
IP address  
Mask  
Default Gateway  
192.168.1.6  
255.255.255.248  
192.168.1.1  
192.168.1.2  
255.255.255.248  
192.168.1.1  
192.168.1.5  
255.255.255.248  
192.168.1.1  
192.168.1.3  
192.168.1.4  
255.255.255.248 255.255.255.248  
192.168.1.1 192.168.1.1  
Figure 4-4. Setting up the IP Mask  
4-10  
Quick Setup Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
ISDN Settings  
FCD-IPM is available with ISDN “S” and “U” options.  
Table 4-4. ISDN Settings  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
Protocol (ISDN)  
Assigns the protocol provided by the ISDN service in your  
area. Some additional parameters may be requested  
depending on the selected protocol.  
Bandwidth  
56, 64, 112, 128 kbps Assigns a bandwidth. The bandwidth is the rate at which data  
passes through the link. The greater the bandwidth, the more  
information can be sent through the link. FCD-IPM allows  
you to work with a bandwidth of 56, 64, 112, or 128 kbps.  
Selection of 112 or 128 kbps for protocols other than IDSL  
means MLPPP will be invoked.  
Connection  
Type  
Specifies the type of connection used to connect to the  
Internet or Intranet.  
Answer only  
If the link is to be used only for receiving incoming  
connections  
Answer&Originate  
Originate only  
If the link is to be used for both incoming and out going  
connections (not simultaneously)  
If the link is to be used for outgoing connections only.  
Destination  
Phone Number  
Defines the phone number used to connect to the Internet or  
Intranet. To edit the phone number, erase the number with  
the Backspace key and enter the new number. This  
parameter appears only when the connection type is  
Originate only or Answer&Originate.  
Connection  
Determines when the link between the local LAN and the  
Internet should be activated. Selecting any frame for  
forwarding, activates the link only when there is traffic to be  
sent on the link. Selecting Always keeps the link active,  
independent of traffic. The Connection parameter is  
important in reducing operating costs.  
Frame Relay Settings  
You need to set the DCLI number, to allow connection to the Frame Relay  
network without setting Frame Relay parameters.  
DLCI Number  
Select this parameter to set the DLCI number.  
Quick Setup Menu  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
V.24 Async Settings  
Two settings that must be made.  
Table 4-5. V.24 Async Settings  
Parameters  
Description  
Modem Type  
Select this parameter to select the modem type.  
Baud Rate  
Select this parameter to display the rate at which data is sent between FCD-IPM and  
the modem. Use the Space Bar to toggle between the different baud rates. The Quick  
Setup default value is recommended for your modem.  
Security Settings  
This feature provides protection from unauthorized access through the Internet.  
Table 4-6. Security Settings  
Parameters  
Description  
Device Access  
Name  
Display the name assigned to FCD-IPM for identification by the Internet Provider. To  
change the device access name, type in the new name and press Enter.  
Device Access  
Password  
Assign or updates a password. The password is used to access the Internet.  
Security Type  
Permits access to all users (disable) or restrict access to allow/deny users whose profiles  
are defined (enable) in the system.  
4-12  
Quick Setup Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
4.4 Security Setup Menu  
Topics covered in this section include:  
•
•
•
•
•
Enabling Telnet access  
Enabling SMNP access  
Enabling/disabling the Solid Firewall  
Changing the login password  
IP Address translation (NAT).  
Quick Setup  
Security Setup  
Advanced  
1
2
3
Menu  
View  
4
Diagnostic  
Tools  
5
1
2
3
Device  
IP Address  
Translation  
FIREWALL  
Access  
Options  
Restrictions  
Figure 4-5. Security Setup Menu Outline  
The Security Setup menu allows you to control access to FCD-IPM and access to  
the LAN. FCD-IPM is protected against unauthorized user access by disabling  
access via SNMP and TELNET. The Solid Firewall is used to protect the LAN  
against undesired entry.  
ꢀ
To access the Security Setup Menu:  
1. In the Main menu, press 2.  
The Security Setup menu appears (refer to Figure 4-6).  
SECURITY SETUP ( Device name - FCD-IPM)  
--------------  
1. Device access restrictions  
2. FIREWALL options  
3. IP address translation  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 4-6. Security Setup Menu  
The Security Setup options are described below.  
Security Setup Menu  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Device Access Restriction  
Parameters listed on this screen allow you to control access to FCD-IPM  
configuration from the control port or from LAN/WAN (via Telnet and SNMP).  
Enabling Telnet Access  
FCD-IPM supports Telnet. This allows FCD-IPM to be configured and controlled  
over the WAN and LAN using TCP/IP.  
Access to Telnet requires authentication by the device, using username and  
password.  
By default, Telnet access to FCD-IPM is disabled to prevent changes being made to  
the unit's configuration parameters.  
ꢀ
To enable Telnet access:  
1. From the Security Setup menu, select option 1, Device Access Restrictions.  
2. From the Device Access Restrictions menu, select option 1, TELNET Access  
Status and change it to Enable.  
3. Select options 2 and 3 to change the User name and Password, if required.  
FCD-IPM can now be accessed using your TELNET username and password.  
Enabling SNMP Access  
By default, access to FCD-IPM via SNMP is disabled. Blocking SNMP access  
prevents changes being made to the unit's configuration parameters.  
ꢀ
To enable SNMP access:  
1. From the Security Setup menu, select option 1, Devise Access Restrictions.  
2. From the Devise Access Restrictions menu, select option 4, SNMP Access  
Status and change it to Enable.  
3. Select options 5, 6, and 7 to change Read, Write and Trap communities, if  
required.  
FCD-IPM can now be accessed for SNMP operation using the appropriate  
communities.  
Changing Login Password  
Entrance to configuration screens, via terminal from the control port, is set by the  
factory default as Protected by Password. The default password is 1234.  
ꢀ
To change the password or remove password protection:  
1. From the Security Setup menu, select option 1, Device Access Restrictions.  
2. From the Device Access Restrictions menu, select option 8, Monitor User  
Password.  
3. Enter a new value for the Password.  
4-14  
Security Setup Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
Supervisor Access  
FCD-IPM has the option of dual–level password access. This allows certain menus  
to be blocked from a regular user, while permitting a supervisor to access and alter  
the parameters of these menus. To use this option, set a Monitor Supervisor  
Password.  
ꢀ
To set a Monitor Supervisor Password:  
1. From the Security Setup menu, select option 1, Device Access Restrictions.  
2. From the Device Access Restrictions menu, select option 9, Monitor  
Supervisor Password.  
Note  
Leaving Password blank removes login protection.  
Firewall Option  
Solid Firewall is a rule-based security mechanism, which monitors incoming and  
outgoing traffic and allows or restricts access according to the user-defined criteria  
(rules).  
You can configure the Solid Firewall to monitor incoming or outgoing traffic on any  
WAN and LAN link. The firewall blocks all traffic coming from the unprotected  
network segment to the protected section, and allows traffic from protected to  
unprotected segments. Only those applications that are enabled via the application  
list (e.g. HTTP, FTP, POP3 servers, etc.) are allowed for use. By default, the Solid  
Firewall is disabled.  
ꢀ
To select the Solid Firewall interface and direction:  
1. From the Main menu, select option 2, Security Setup.  
2. From the Security Setup menu, select option 2, Firewall Options.  
The Firewall Setup menu appears (see Figure 4-8).  
3. From the Firewall Setup menu, type 1.  
The Firewall Interface menu appears (see Figure 4-9).  
4. From the Firewall Interface menu, type A and define the link on which you  
intend to set the firewall and traffic type to monitor:  
ꢀ Inbound – The firewall blocks the traffic coming into FCD-IPM via the link  
on which the firewall is enabled. The firewall forwards the traffic going out  
of the firewall-protected interface to its destination.  
ꢀ Outbound – The firewall blocks the traffic going out of FCD-IPM via the  
link on which the firewall is enabled. The firewall grants access to the traffic  
coming into FCD-IPM from the network segment attached to the  
firewall-protected interface.  
5. Press <Esc> and save new values.  
Security Setup Menu  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
ꢀ
To define the Solid Firewall rules:  
1. From the Firewall Setup menu, type 2.  
The Firewall Rules menu appears (see Figure 4-10).  
2. From the Firewall Rules menu, type A and perform the following:  
ꢀ Define a link on which the rule will be applied  
ꢀ Specify the source IP address range by defining the start and end addresses.  
ꢀ Specify the destination IP address range by defining the start and end  
addresses.  
ꢀ Enable the application used by the rule (user defined, Telnet, Ping, HTTP,  
FTP, TFTP, POP3, SMTP, SNMP, SNMP Trap, BOOTP/DHCP, DNS Client  
to Server, or DNS Server to Server).  
ꢀ If you select a user-defined application, you must specify the following  
parameters:  
ꢁ
ꢁ
Protocol type: TCP, UPD or ICMP  
Minimum and maximum port value for TCP and UDP protocols, or  
ICMP message type for ICMP protocol.  
3. Press <Esc> and save new firewall rule values.  
For example, two LANs are connected to the FCD-IPM 10BaseT ports  
(see Figure 4-7). LAN 1 includes company’s Web, mail and FTP servers, which  
cab be accessed from the outside. Employees’ PCs sitting on LAN 2 must not  
be reached from the outside, but they must be allowed to access the servers.  
In order to grant access to LAN 1 and restrict it to LAN 2, you must set up two  
firewalls:  
Firewall 1  
ꢀ Select interface – main link  
ꢀ Select direction – inbound  
ꢀ Define rule 1 for Web server:  
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Start and end source IP address – 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255  
Start and end destination IP address – 192.111.111.111  
Protocol – HTTP.  
ꢀ Define rule 2 for mail server, which is identical to rule 1, except for  
destination IP addresses (192.111.111.112) and protocol (SMTP).  
ꢀ Define rule 3 for FTP server, which is identical to rule 1, except for  
destination IP addresses (192.111.111.113) and protocol (FTP).  
Firewall 2  
ꢀ Select interface – LAN 2  
ꢀ Select direction – outbound.  
4-16  
Security Setup Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
Main Link  
Firewall 1  
LAN 1  
Inbound  
Firewall 2  
LAN 2  
Outbound  
FCD-IPM  
Users  
Web Server  
Mail Server  
FTP Server  
192.110.110.0  
192.111.111.111 192.111.111.112 192.111.111.113  
Figure 4-7. Configuring Firewalls  
FIREWALL SETUP ( Device name - FCD-IPM )  
--------------  
1. FIREWALL Interfaces  
2. FIREWALL Rules  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 4-8. Firewall Setup Menu  
FIREWALL INTERFACES ( Device name - FCD-IPM )  
-------------------  
Interface  
Direction  
OPTIONS: A-Add  
Press one of the above or ESC to return to previous screen:  
Select interface: [LINK 1  
]
Select Direction: [Inbound ]  
Figure 4-9. Firewall Interfaces Menu  
Security Setup Menu  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
FIREWALL RULES ( Device name - FCD-IPM )  
--------------  
Interface  
Direction  
OPTIONS: A-Add  
Press one of the above or ESC to return to previous screen:  
Select interface: [LINK 1  
]
Enter start source IP address: 000.000.000.000  
Enter end source IP address : 222.222.222.222  
Enter start destination IP address :  
Enter end destination IP address  
Select application type: [Telnet  
:
]
Figure 4-10. Firewall Rules Menu  
IP Address Translation (NAT)  
IP Address Translation allows a NET that uses a private IP Address to connect to  
the Public Internet/Intranet (Single IP is one of the IP Address Translation types).  
IP ADDRESS TRANSLATION (Device name – FCD-IPM)  
----------------------  
Type  
Interface Status  
Range  
OPTIONS: A-Add  
Press one of the above or ESC to return to previous screen:  
Figure 4-11. IP Address Translation Menu  
Pubic Internet/  
Intranet  
"Real IP Addresses"  
FCD-IPM  
...  
PC#1  
PC#n  
PC#2  
"Virtual IP Addresses"  
Figure 4-12. IP Address Translation  
4-18  
Security Setup Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
IP Address Translation permits some, or all, PCs on your private LAN to be  
represented with legal IP Addresses that are defined on the internet/Intranet (refer  
to Figure 4-12).  
FCD-IPM supports the IP Address Translation types listed in Table 4-7.  
Table 4-7. IP Address Translation (NAT) Settings  
Parameters  
Description  
Static Single  
Static Range  
Concurrent  
A PC with its Virtual Address specified will have access to the Internet/Intranet with a legal,  
real IP Address. Bidirectional one-to-one access is allowed.  
PCs with their Virtual Addresses within the specified range will have access to the  
Internet/Intranet with a legal, real IP Address range. Bidirectional N-to-N access is allowed.  
A number of PCs (n) with their Virtual Addresses within the specified range will have access,  
but only some of them (m) can work simultaneously (m<n). The application must be started  
from the private LAN.  
Transparent  
Address translation is not performed for a specified range of IP Addresses. This setup may be  
used for the application shown in Figure 4-13.  
PAT (Port  
Address  
FCD-IPM connects a UDP or TCP port to a specified IP address. PAT is available for single IP  
only.  
Translation)  
Single IP  
The whole Private LAN is represented as a single legal IP Address on Internet/Intranet.  
Pubic Internet/  
Intranet  
FCD-IPM  
...  
PC#1  
PC#2  
PC#n  
Servers with Legal IP Addresses  
for Outgoing Services  
Figure 4-13. IP Address Transparent  
Note  
For Static and Concurrent Address Translation, all PCs on your LAN with IP  
Addresses not covered by the listed definitions will not obtain access to the  
Internet/Intranet.  
You may enter more than one entry of each type.  
Each definition in a list may be Enabled or Disabled separately.  
Security Setup Menu  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
4.5 Advanced Setup Menu  
The Advanced Menu contains the majority of FCD-IPM configuration parameters.  
You can change these parameters and perform advanced configuration operations  
that are not available through the Quick Setup menu. Resetting FCD-IPM and  
software downloads are also performed via the Advanced Menu.  
Advanced Menu  
1
Setup  
2
Device Control  
Figure 4-14. Advanced Menu Outline  
ꢀ
To access the Advanced Menu:  
•
In the Main Menu, press 3.  
The Advanced Menu appears (refer to Figure 4-15).  
ADVANCED MENU (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
-------------  
1. Setup  
2. Device control  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 4-15. Advanced Menu  
The options in the Advanced Menu are:  
•
•
Setup - used to modify setup parameters  
Device Control - used to download the software and parameters, and perform  
reset operations.  
These options are described in the sections below.  
Setup Menu  
Refer to Chapter 5 for a detailed description of this option.  
4-20  
Advanced Setup Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
Device Control Menu  
Advanced Menu  
Setup  
1
2
Device Control  
1
2
3
4
5
Upload Device  
Parameters to  
TFTP Server  
Download Device  
Parameters from  
TFTP Server  
Software  
Download  
Reset Options  
Terminal Type  
1. VT-100, VT-200,  
VT-220 ANSI  
Terminals  
1. Download  
from TFTP  
Server  
1. Reset Device  
2. Reset Link  
2. XMODEM via  
Control Port (BOOT  
Manager)  
2. VT-52, IBM 3101  
Terminals  
3. Reset Interface  
Module  
3. Other Terminals  
Figure 4-16. Device Control Menu Outline  
ꢀ
To access the Device Control menu:  
In the Advanced Menu, press 2.  
The Device Control menu appears (refer to Figure 4-17).  
•
DEVICE CONTROL (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
--------------  
1. Software download  
2. Upload device parameters to TFTP server  
3. Download device parameters from TFTP server  
4. Reset options  
5. Terminal type  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 4-17. Device Control Menu  
The options in the Device Control menu are described below.  
Advanced Setup Menu  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Software Download  
Select this option to download a new software version.  
SOFTWARE PARAMETERS IN THE DOWNLOAD (Device name-FCD-IPM)  
-----------------------------------  
1. Download from TFTP Server  
2. XMODEM via control port (BOOT Manager)  
3. Download software to ISDN module  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 4-18. Software Download Menu  
FCD-IPM includes a Dual Image Flash, capable of storing two different versions of  
software in two different partitions.  
Upon reset (or boot, refer to Appendix D), FCD-IPM automatically runs the  
program stored in the active partition.  
New software versions are loaded into the backup partition. If loading succeeds,  
the backup partition becomes active and reset is automatically performed, running  
the new software version. If loading fails, however, the device will still be capable  
of working, since the Flash partition storing the old version is still active. Refer to  
Figure 4-19.  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Original  
S/W Version  
Copy 1  
Original  
S/W Version  
Copy 2  
Original  
S/W Version  
New  
S/W Version  
Active Partition  
Backup Partition  
Active Partition  
Backup Partition  
Step 3  
Original  
S/W Version  
New  
S/W Version  
Backup Partition  
Active Partition  
Figure 4-19. Using the Dual Image Flash  
4-22  
Advanced Setup Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
Control Dual Image Flash by the BOOT Manager. You use the BOOT Manager to  
manually define active and backup partition, run backup partition, erase some or  
all information from Flash etc. The BOOT Manager is accessible via the above  
menu or immediately after resetting the hardware. Refer to Appendix C for a  
detailed description of the BOOT Manager.  
The options in the Software Download menu are described below.  
Download from TFTP Server  
TFTP is an IP/UDP client-server application. The unit is a TFTP client. Operating  
opposite the client, you need a TFTP server connected to the LAN or WAN  
interface via an IP network.  
TFTP Server  
IP Address: 192.168.10.11  
Stores file at C:\booting\boot.exe  
Transfer  
File  
FCD-IPM  
TFTP Client  
Figure 4-20. Downloading from a TFTP Server  
ꢀ
To download a new software version via TFTP server:  
1. Select option 1 from the Software Download menu.  
Do you want to download new software version? (y/n): Y  
TFTP server IP address: 192.168.182.34  
New software file name: fcdipm.mbi  
Download process will erase the program code  
in the second partition of the device.  
Upon completion of the download,  
the device will be reset automatically.  
Press 'S' to start the download process  
or  
ESC to return to previous menu:  
Figure 4-21. Software Download Menu  
2. Confirm that the Do You Want To Download New Software Version field is  
set to Yes.  
3. In the TFTP Server IP Address field, type the IP address of the TFTP server.  
Advanced Setup Menu  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
4. In the New Software File Name field, type the path and file name of the new  
software version.  
Note  
The IP address and the new software version file name can also be defined through  
the Setup menu. Refer to Setup at the beginning of the chapter.  
5. Press S to start the download process.  
During the process, the new program code is downloaded to the Flash backup  
partition, thus erasing its previous contents.  
Upon completion, the newly downloaded Flash partition becomes active,  
while the old version’s partition becomes backup. The device automatically  
resets, running the new program stored in the active partition.  
During the download process, a counter shows the number of packets that have  
passed. Downloading can be interrupted at any time by pressing the ESC key.  
XMODEM via Control Port (BOOT Manager)  
Use this option to access the BOOT Manager via the control port. Refer to  
Appendix B for more information on the Boot Manager.  
Upload Device Parameters to TFTP Server  
Select this parameter to save device configuration parameters into a file by  
uploading to the TFTP server. This operation sends all unit parameters to the TFTP  
server and will be saved under a filename that you specify.  
Parameter File Download/Upload  
IP  
FCD-IPM  
TFTP Server  
Figure 4-22. Downloading/Uploading Parameters  
To upload device parameters:  
ꢀ
1. Activate the TFTP server application connected to the unit via an IP network.  
2. Configure the following IP parameters: IP address, IP mask and IP default  
gateway.  
3. Select the TFTP upload option.  
4. Enter the TFTP server IP address.  
5. Assign a name to the configuration file you want to save on the server, for  
example V35_file.  
6. Press S to start the upload process.  
4-24  
Advanced Setup Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
Download Device Parameters from TFTP Server  
Select this option to load device configuration parameters from a file by  
downloading from the TFTP server.  
ꢀ
To download device parameters:  
1. Activate the TFTP server application connected to the unit via an IP network.  
2. Configure the following IP parameters: IP address, IP mask and IP default  
gateway.  
3. Select the TFTP download option.  
4. Enter the TFTP server IP address.  
5. Enter the name of the configuration file you want to download from the server,  
for example V35_file.  
6. Press S to start the download process.  
Note  
Upon completion of the download process, the unit performs reset. The new  
parameters only come into effect after resetting.  
Reset Options  
Select this option for resetting the device, link, or interface module.  
Terminal Type  
Select this option to choose a terminal type. Since each terminal type uses  
different ASCII control codes for cursor control, FCD-IPM requires this information  
to display the screens clearly. This setting affects the Statistics screen display only.  
Advanced Setup Menu  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
4.6 View Menu  
Use the View menu options to see information on interface connections, routing  
tables, statistics, diagnostics, and alarms.  
Quick Setup  
1
Security Setup  
2
Advanced Menu  
3
View  
4
Diagnostic Tools  
5
7
E1/T1  
Alarms  
Log File  
1
2
3
4
5
6
E1/T1  
Diagnostics  
Interface  
Connections  
Routing  
Tables  
SHDSL  
Status  
Statistics  
Configuration  
Link Number  
1. Bridge  
2. IP Interfaces  
Advanced Link  
Configuration  
3. IP Routing  
4. IPX Routing  
5. IPX Services  
6. ARP  
7. OSPF Related  
Information  
8. IP Address  
Pool  
Figure 4-23. View Menu Outline  
To access the View Menu:  
ꢀ
•
In the Main Menu, press 4.  
The View Menu appears (see Figure 4-24).  
The options in the View Menu are described in this chapter.  
4-26  
View Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
VIEW MENU (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
---------  
1. Configuration  
2. Interface Connections  
3. Routing Tables  
4. Statistics  
5. SHDSL Status  
6. E1/T1 Diagnostics  
7. E1/T1 alarms log file  
Press number to select or ESC to return to the previous menu:  
Figure 4-24. View Menu  
Configuration  
Select this option to view the configuration parameters for the device and link that  
were entered through the Setup menu. The View Configuration screen displays the  
general unit configuration and parameters such as names, addresses and link types  
(including link baud rate and status). When typing the interface number, detailed  
information on the interface appears. Since these screens are “display-only” you  
cannot use them to adjust parameters.  
View Menu  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
VIEW CONFIGURATION (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
------------------  
Device type: FCD-IPM  
Contact person  
: name of contact person  
System location : the location of this device  
Hardware version  
: 1.0 (1997-11-17)  
Software version  
: 3.00 B1 (2003-03-11)  
Burned-In MAC address  
: 0020 D217 5F61 (active)  
Local Administered MAC address : 4020 D217 5F61  
IP address : 10.10.90.1  
Link Interface Type Clock(Kbps)  
----- ---------- ---------------- -----------  
Status  
------  
Mode  
----  
1) 1  
2) 2  
SHDSL+SUB Synchronous  
V.11 DTE Synchronous  
Ext Link1/ 0  
External/ 0  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Bridge  
Bridge  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------  
I/O1: FXS  
I/O2: FXS  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
For advanced link configuration information - enter link number:  
Figure 4-25. View Configuration Screen  
4-28  
View Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
Interface Connections  
This screen displays the connection status for all FCD-IPM LAN and WAN  
interfaces. The information includes physical connections like E1, subE1 V.35,  
ISDN and logical connections like DLCIs in Frame Relay. Each row in the screen  
shows the last successful channel synchronization.  
INTERFACE CONNECTIONS (Device name – FCD-IPM)  
---------------------  
INTERFACE ROUTING  
TYPE  
DEVICE  
NAME  
CONNECTED  
USER NAME  
CONNECTION  
STATUS  
-------------------------------------------------------------  
LAN 1  
LINK1  
Bridge + IP  
IP PPP  
Close  
LCP+IP/VJ  
LCP+IP  
MANAGEMENT Mngmnt PPP  
FIX SUB  
IO1  
Local sync loss  
Remote sync loss  
Remote sync loss  
IO2  
R – Refresh  
ESC – Return to previous menu  
Figure 4-26. Interface Connections Screen  
Routing Tables  
Select this option to display different routing tables.  
ROUTING TABLES (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
--------------  
1. Bridge  
2. IP Interfaces  
3. IP Routing  
4. IPX Routing  
5. IPX Services  
6. ARP  
7. OSPF  
8. IP Address Pool  
ESC - Return to previous screen  
Figure 4-27. Routing Tables Menu  
The options in the Routing Tables menu are described below.  
View Menu  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Bridge  
Select this option to display a table that contains information on Bridge MAC  
addresses (see Figure 4-28).  
BRIDGE TABLE (Page-1) (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
------------  
MAC ADDRESS  
-----------  
TYPE  
----  
INTERFACE  
---------  
0020D2FD5153  
Static or Dynamic  
LAN  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Figure 4-28. Bridge Table  
IP Interfaces  
Details the routing interfaces information.  
IP INTERFACES TABLE (Page-1) ( Device name - FCD-IPM )  
-------------------  
IP ADDRESS  
IP MASK  
MTU PROTOCOL INTERFACE STATUS  
--------------- --------------- ----- --------- ---------- ------  
192.170.007.001 255.255.255.000 1500 --------- LAN 1  
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 1500 --------- LINK 1  
UP  
UP  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Figure 4-29. IP Interfaces Table  
IP Routing  
Select this option to display a table that contains information on IP routing.  
IP ROUTE TABLE (Page-1) ( Device name - FCD-IPM )  
IP ADDRESS IP MASK TYPE COST NEXT HOP  
AGEING INTERFACE  
------------- --------------- ------ ---- --------------- -------- ----------  
default gateway  
192.170.007.000 255.255.255.000 INTRF  
LINK 1  
0 192.170.007.001 00:00:00 LAN 1  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Figure 4-30. IP Routing Table  
4-30  
View Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
IPX Routing  
Select this option to display information on IPX routing.  
IPX ROUTING TABLE (Page-1) (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
-----------------  
IPX NET  
-------  
IPX NODE  
--------  
TYPE  
----  
HOPS TICKS AGEING INTERFACE  
---- ----- ------ ---------  
0000000A 0000C0F5D899 NET (RIP)  
0000001B 0000C0F5D899 NET (RIP)  
0000001C 0000C0F5D899 NET (RIP)  
0000001D 0000C0F5D899 NET (RIP)  
0000001E 0000C0F5D899 NET (RIP)  
0000001F 0000C0F5D899 NET (RIP)  
0000001G 0000C0F5D899 NET (RIP)  
0000001H 0000C0F5D899 NET (RIP)  
0000002I 0000C0F5D899 NET (RIP)  
0000002J 0000C0F5D899 NET (RIP)  
0000003K 0000C0F5D899 NET (RIP)  
0000006L 0000C0F5D899 NET (RIP)  
0000009M 0000C0F5D899 NET (RIP)  
0000012N 0000C0F5D899 NET (RIP)  
0000067O 0000C0F5D899 NET (RIP)  
0000083P 0000C0F5D899 NET (RIP)  
1
4
3
3
3
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
2 00:00:50 LAN  
5 00:00:50 LAN  
4 00:00:50 LAN  
4 00:00:50 LAN  
4 00:00:50 LAN  
2 00:00:50 LAN  
4 00:00:50 LAN  
4 00:00:50 LAN  
4 00:00:50 LAN  
4 00:00:50 LAN  
4 00:00:50 LAN  
4 00:00:50 LAN  
3 00:00:50 LAN  
4 00:00:50 LAN  
4 00:00:50 LAN  
4 00:00:50 LAN  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Figure 4-31. IPX Routing Table  
View Menu  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
IPX Services  
Select this option to display a table that contains information on IPX services (SAP  
table).  
IPX SERVICES TABLE (Page-1) (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
------------------  
SERVER NAME  
-------------  
TYPE  
----  
IPX NET  
-------  
HOPS INTERFACE  
---- ---------  
ACCESS  
ACCOUNT_RAD  
BACKUP  
ENG  
0004  
0004  
0004  
0004  
0004  
0004  
3381AFCA  
0000AAAB  
0001267C  
ACE1111D  
00AA110E  
0032142F  
2
2
2
3
2
1
LAN  
LAN  
LAN  
LAN  
LAN  
LAN  
EXPORT  
FDD_EYE  
ESC - Return to previous menu , N - next screen  
Figure 4-32. IPX Services Table  
ARP  
Select this option to display the correlation between the IP address and the  
MAC address of each station on the LAN  
ARP TABLE (Page-1) (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
---------  
IP ADDRESS  
----------  
MAC ADDRESS  
-----------  
AGING  
-----  
192.168.1.33  
192.168.1.35  
192.168.1.36  
192.168.1.38  
0020D2FD9F16 00:00:00  
0000B431CBD6 00:00:50  
0000B471B335 00:02:15  
0020D2FD51F0 00:02:15  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Figure 4-33. ARP Table  
4-32  
View Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
IP Address Pool (DHCP)  
Select this option to display the allocation of IP address from the IP address pool  
(DHCP Server).  
IP ADDRESS POOL (Page-1) (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
---------------  
IP ADDRESS  
IP MASK  
MAC  
TIME STATUS INTERFACE  
--------------- --------------- --------- ----- -------- ----------  
001.001.001.001 255.255.255.000  
001.001.001.002 255.255.255.000  
001.001.001.003 255.255.255.000  
001.001.001.004 255.255.255.000  
001.001.001.005 255.255.255.000  
0
0
0
0
0
DECLINED  
FREE  
FREE  
FREE  
FREE  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Figure 4-34. IP Address Pool (DHCP) Table  
OSPF Related Information  
Select this option to display OSPF protocol related information such as common  
information, border router information, OSPF database, and interface information  
OSPF RELATED INFORMATION ( Device name - FCD-IPM)  
1. Interfaces  
2. Neighbours  
3. Database  
4. Memory Allocation  
Press number to select or ESC to return to the previous menu:  
Figure 4-35. OSPF Related Information Menu  
OSPF INTERFACES TABLE (Page-1) ( Device name - FCD-IPM  
---------------------  
)
IP ADDRESS  
AREA ID  
TYPE PRIO DES ROUTER  
--------------- --------------- ------ ---- ---------------  
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.001 P-T-P 0001 000.000.000.000  
192.168.001.001 000.000.000.003 BRDCST 0001 192.168.001.007  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Figure 4-36. OSPF Interfaces Table  
View Menu  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
OSPF NEIGHBOURS TABLE (Page-1) ( Device name - FCD-IPM  
---------------------  
)
IP ADDRESS  
ID  
PRIO STATE  
--------------- --------------- ---- ---------  
192.168.001.003 192.168.001.003 0001 Full  
192.168.001.007 000.000.000.004 0001 Full  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Figure 4-37. OSPF Neighbors Table  
OSPF DATABASE TABLE (Page-1) ( Device name - FCD-IPM  
-------------------  
)
AREA ID  
TYPE  
LS-ID  
ORIG RTR  
SEQ NUM AGE CKSUM  
--------------- ---- --------------- --------------- -------- ----- ------  
000.000.000.001 1 192.168.001.003 192.168.001.003 80000691 264 EF87  
000.000.000.001 1 209.227.164.065 209.227.164.065 80000034 143 32DC  
000.000.000.001 3 131.010.000.000 209.227.164.065 8000000E 154 D7C1  
000.000.000.001 3 192.168.001.000 209.227.164.065 80000036 150 F9C0  
000.000.000.003 1 000.000.000.004 000.000.000.004 8000010F 147 4BE2  
000.000.000.003 1 209.227.164.065 209.227.164.065 80000040 160 6432  
000.000.000.003 2 192.168.001.007 000.000.000.004 80000003 1423 679B  
000.000.000.003 3 192.114.031.000 209.227.164.065 80000009 146 F7FD  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Figure 4-38. OSPF Database Table  
4-34  
View Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
Statistics  
Select this option to display information on the traffic between the networks  
connected by FCD-IPM. The statistics enable you to view network performance.  
STATISTICS FOR THE LAST 00:03:47 (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
LAN 1 STATISTICS (per second) CURRENT  
------------------  
MAX  
AVG  
1) Total network frames  
2) Received good frames  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
3) Received good broadcast/multicast 00000  
4) Received masked frames  
5) Transmitted frames  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
00000  
6) Memory overflow errors  
7) LAN errors  
8) Received missed frames errors  
9) LAN buffers overflow  
C - Clear statistics, U - Update average,  
L - LAN, Link Number  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Figure 4-39. LAN Statistics  
SHDSL Status and Statistics  
Select this option to display information on the SHDSL line status and statistics  
collected over 15-minute and 24-hour intervals.  
Displaying the SHDSL Status  
Current status of the SHDSL line interface can be viewed from the SHDSL Status  
screen.  
ꢀ
To access the SHDSL Status screen:  
•
From the View menu (see Figure 4-24), type 5.  
The SHDSL Status screen appears (see Figure 4-40).  
The SHDSL Status parameters are listed in Table 4-8.  
View Menu  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Table 4-8. SHDSL Status Screen Parameters  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
Op. State  
Operational status of the SHDSL link  
Link is down  
Idle  
Handshake, Training,  
Framer Sync  
FCD-IPM is establishing communication link with remote  
device  
Data  
Data is being transferred over the SHDSL link  
Bitrate  
Actual line rate after the handshake process is completed  
Loop Attenuation  
Difference (in dB) between the power transmitted from FCD-  
IPM and the power received by the unit operating at the other  
side of the application  
Transmit Power  
SNR  
Level of power (in dB) which is transmitted on the SHDSL line  
Signal-to-noise ratio, difference (in dB) between signal and  
background noise  
SHDSL DSP Version,  
SHDSL Driver  
Version  
SHDSL DSP and driver revisions  
Note  
Loop Attenuation, Transmit Power and SNR are displayed only when OP. State is in  
Data mode.  
SHDSL STATUS ( Device name - FCD-IPM )  
Op. State  
: Data  
: Sync  
: 1032  
: 5  
Framer Status  
Bitrate  
Loop Attenuation  
Transmit Power  
SNR  
: 7.5  
: 14  
SHDSL DSP Version : 1  
SHDSL Driver Version: R1.7.1  
CRC  
ES  
SES  
LOSW LOSWS UAS  
--------  
---- ---- ---- ---- ----- ----  
15 Min :  
24 hours :  
3
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ESC - previous menu | M - More | R - Refresh | C - Clear statistics  
Figure 4-40. SHDSL Status  
4-36  
View Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
Displaying the SHDSL Statistics  
FCD-IPM collects statistics over the current, 15-minute and 24-hour intervals  
(see Figure 4-40):  
•
•
15 Min – Last 15-minute interval  
24 hours – Last 24-hour interval.  
Table 4-9 describes the SHDSL statistics parameters.  
Table 4-9. SHDSL Statistics Parameters  
Display  
Description  
CRC  
ES  
Number of CRC error events recorded during the current interval  
Number of errored seconds in which one or more CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) error  
events occurred during the current interval. This value is updated every second.  
SES  
Number of severely errored seconds in which 832 or more CRC error events occurred during  
the current interval. This value is updated every second.  
LOSW  
Number of loss of sync word events recorded during the current interval  
LOSWS  
Number of seconds with loss of sync word during the current interval. This value is updated  
every second.  
UAS  
Number of unavailable seconds in which a failed signal occurred during the current interval.  
This value is updated every second.  
In addition FCD-IPM displays statistics report for all 15-minute intervals in the last  
24 hours (see Figure 4-41).  
ꢀ
To display statistics for specific intervals:  
1. From the SHDSL Status screen, type M.  
The SHDSL Statistics over Intervals screen appears (see Figure 4-41).  
2. Type N to display the next page of the SHDSL statistics.  
SHDSL STATUS ( Device name - FCD-IPM )  
Interval  
CRC  
ES  
SES  
LOSW LOSWS UAS  
-------- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----- ----  
1.  
2.  
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
9.  
10.  
11.  
12.  
ESC - previous menu | N - Next page  
Figure 4-41. SHDSL Statistics over Intervals  
View Menu  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
ꢀ
To refresh or clear statistics:  
•
From the SHDSL Status screen, type R to refresh the display or type C to clear  
the SHDSL statistics.  
E1/T1 Diagnostics  
Select this option to display error information for the E1/T1 link. This information  
enables you to evaluate the line quality. The errors are accumulated in 15-minute  
intervals. FCD-IPM keeps up to 96 intervals (for 24 hours).  
In addition, there is a rolling 24 hour total of each error parameter. The rolling  
total is displayed for the interval parameter called TOTAL. The interval parameter  
called CURRENT is the open interval, which did not yet reach 15 minutes. The  
errors counted in the CURRENT interval are not included in the TOTAL interval.  
The amount of time that has elapsed is displayed on the right of the CURRENT  
parameter line. T1 diagnostics are available only when frame mode is ESF. E1  
diagnostics are available only when CRC-4 is enabled.  
T1 DIAGNOSTICS - LINK 1 (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
-----------------------  
INTERVAL  
ES  
UAS  
SES  
BES  
LOFC  
CSS  
DM  
-------- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----  
CURRENT 163 173  
1
1
1
0
02.53 min  
ESC - previous menu | R - Refresh | C - Clear diagnostics  
Figure 4-42. T1 Diagnostics  
E1 DIAGNOSTICS - LINK 1 (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
--------------  
INTERVAL  
ES  
0
UAS  
0
SES  
0
BES  
0
LOFC  
CSS  
0
DM  
CURRENT  
0
0
0
0
0
0
06.15 min  
1
0
0
0
0
0
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
1
0
0
1
0
Total  
1
0
0
1
0
0
ESC – previous menu | R – Refresh | C – Clear diagnostics  
Figure 4-43. E1 Diagnostics  
4-38  
View Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
Interval Parameters  
Table 4-10. Interval Parameters  
Description  
Parameters  
Current Errored Seconds (ES) An errored second is any second containing one or more CRC error  
events, one or more OOF events, or one or more controlled slip  
events.  
Unavailable Seconds Out-Of- An unavailable second out-of-frame is any second in which a failed  
Frame (UAS)  
signal state exists. A failed signal state is declared when 10 consecutive  
severely errored seconds (SES) occur, and is cleared after 10  
consecutive seconds of data are processed without a SES.  
Severely Errored Seconds  
(SES)  
A SES is a second with 832 or more CRC error events, or one or more  
OOF events.  
Bursty Errored Seconds Out-  
Of-Frame (BES)  
A BES is a second with 2 to 831 CRC error events.  
Current Loss of Frame  
Counter (LOFC)  
The loss of frame (LOF) counter counts the loss of frame alignment  
events.  
Current Slip Second Counter A CSS is a second with one or more controlled slip events.  
(CSS)  
Degraded Minutes (DM)  
The total number of degraded minutes in the current 24-hour interval.  
A degraded minute is a minute in which the bit error rate (BER)  
exceeded 1x10-6. This number is updated every minute.  
View Menu  
4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
E1/T1 Alarms Log File  
Select this option to display the E1/T1 Alarms Log file.  
E1/T1 ALARMS (Device name – FCD-IPM) time from start – 00:00:09:26  
------------  
INTERFACE  
---------  
TYPE  
-----------  
STATUS  
------  
DAYS  
----  
HOURS  
-----  
MIN  
---  
SEC  
---  
Link 1 MAIN E1 CRC-4 error  
Link 1 MAIN E1 BPV error  
Link 1 MAIN E1 CRC-4 error  
Link 1 MAIN E1 BPV error  
Link 1 MAIN E1 CRC-4 error  
Link 1 MAIN E1 BPV error  
Link 1 MAIN E1 CRC-4 error  
Link 1 MAIN E1 BPV error  
Link 1 MAIN E1 CRC-4 error  
Link 1 MAIN E1 BPV error  
Link 1 MAIN E1 CRC-4 error  
Link 1 MAIN E1 BPV error  
Link 1 MAIN E1 CRC-4 error  
Link 1 MAIN E1 BPV error  
Link 1 MAIN E1 CRC-4 error  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
ESC – previous menu | N – Next page | R – Refresh | C – Clear alarms  
Figure 4-44. E1 Alarms Screen  
E1/T1 ALARMS ( Device name - FCD-IPM  
------------  
) time from start - 00:02:39:39  
INTERFACE  
TYPE  
STATUS DAYS  
HOURS  
MIN  
SEC  
------------- ------------------ ------ ----- ----- ----- -----  
Link 1 MAIN T1  
Link 1 MAIN T1  
Red alarm  
Red alarm  
ON  
ON  
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
ESC - previous menu | R - Refresh | C - Clear alarms  
Figure 4-45. T1 Alarms Screen  
4-40  
View Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 4 Configuration  
4.7 Diagnostic Tools Menu  
This section provides information on using FCD-IPM diagnostic tools.  
Quick Setup  
1
Security Setup  
2
Advanced Menu  
3
View  
4
Diagnostic Tools  
5
1
Ping  
IP Address  
Figure 4-46. Diagnostic Tools Menu Outline  
To access the Diagnostic Tools menu:  
ꢀ
1. In the Main Menu, select option 5.  
The Diagnostic Tools menu appears (see Figure 4-47).  
DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS (Device name – FCD-IPM)  
----------------  
1. Ping terminal  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 4-47. Diagnostic Tools Menu  
The Diagnostic Tools menu has a Ping option. The Ping option allows you to  
confirm IP connectivity by ‘pinging’ (dialing) other IP hosts. If there is a reply from  
the remote IP host, connectivity is confirmed (see Figure 4-48).  
Control of FCD-IPM  
ping terminal  
ping reply  
Router  
192.168.1.5  
ping request  
Small Office  
LAN  
Figure 4-48. Pinging an IP Host  
Diagnostic Tools Menu  
4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4 Configuration  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
ꢀ
To ping another host:  
1. From the Main Menu, select option 5.  
The Diagnostic Tools menu appears.  
2. From the Diagnostic Tools menu, select option 1.  
You are prompted to enter the IP address of the host.  
3. Enter the host's IP address. FCD-IPM pings the destination host.  
A message appears showing the result of the request (see Figure 4-49).  
FCD-IPM continues pinging the host until you press <Esc>.  
PING TERMINAL (Device name – FCD-IPM)  
-------------  
Insert the target IP address in the format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Ping IP address: 10.10.10.10  
Pinging 10.10.10.10  
Reply from 10.10.10.10: time = 0.100 sec  
Reply from 10.10.10.10: time = 0.050 sec  
Reply from 10.10.10.10: time = 0.050 sec  
Reply from 10.10.10.10: time = 0.050 sec  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Figure 4-49. Ping Terminal Screen  
4-42  
Diagnostic Tools Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5  
Setup Menu  
Topics covered in this chapter include:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Host parameters setup  
Routing setup  
Interface parameters setup  
Access control (security) setup  
WAN economy setup  
Factory default options.  
Advanced Menu  
Setup  
1
2
Device Control  
1
2
3
4
5
6
WAN  
Host  
Parameters  
Interface  
Parameters  
Access Control  
(Security)  
Factory Default  
Options  
Routing  
Economy  
Figure 5-1. Setup Menu Outline  
To access the Setup menu:  
ꢀ
•
In the Advanced Menu, press 1.  
The Setup menu appears (refer to Figure 5-2).  
SETUP ( Device name - FCD-IPM)  
-----  
1. Host parameters  
2. Routing / Bridging  
3. Interface parameters  
4. Access control (Security)  
5. WAN economy  
6. Factory default options  
Press number to select or ESC to return to the previous menu:  
Figure 5-2. Setup Menu  
The options in the Setup menu are described below.  
Host Parameters Menu  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
5.1 Host Parameters Menu  
Select this option to enter reference information about the device, the IP Host, the  
SNMP agent and TFTP.  
Advanced Menu  
1
Setup  
2
Device Control  
1
Host Parameters  
2
1
4
5
3
IP Host  
Device ID  
TFTP  
RADIUS  
SNMP Manager  
Table  
1. Retransmitting  
Timeout  
1. RADIUS Server  
IP Address  
1. IP Address  
2. IP Mask  
1. Device Name  
2. Contact Person  
3. System Location  
4. MAC Address  
1. Manager Table  
2. RADIUS  
Authenticator  
2. Total Timeout  
3. RADIUS Accounting  
Status  
3. Default Gateway  
4. RADIUS  
Authentication Port  
5. RADIUS Accounting  
Port  
6. Retransmission  
Timeout  
7. Total Timeout  
Figure 5-3. Host Parameters Menu Outline  
ꢀ
To access the Host Parameters menu:  
1. In the Advanced Menu, press 1.  
The Setup menu appears.  
2. In the Setup menu, press 1.  
The Host Parameters menu appears (refer to Figure 5-3).  
5-2  
Host Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
HOST PARAMETERS ( Device name - FCD-IPM)  
1. Device ID  
2. IP host  
3. SNMP manager table  
4. TFTP  
5. RADIUS  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-4. Host Parameters Menu  
The options in the Host Parameters menu are described below.  
Device ID  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓1  
Host Parameters Menu  
↓1  
Device ID  
DEVICE ID  
---------  
( Device name - FCD-IPM)  
1. Device name: 27  
2. Contact person: name of contact person  
3. System location:  
4. MAC address: 0020 D220 3C59 (Burned-In)  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-5. Device ID Menu  
Host Parameters Menu  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Table 5-1. Device ID Parameters  
Parameters  
Description  
Device Name  
Assigns an arbitrary name to FCD-IPM for identification by the system  
manager; for example "accounting"  
Contact Person  
Name of the person to be contacted with matters pertaining to the  
system; for example "John Doe"  
System Location Physical location of the device; for example "Building 3 Floor 4"  
MAC Address  
AssignS a MAC address locally. This allows you additional control of  
the devices in the LAN. FCD-IPM can be used with the burned-in  
(default) address provided by the manufacturer or with a locally  
administered address; for example 4020 2D16 1234. Locally  
administered addresses are very useful for managing large networks  
IP Host  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓1  
Host Parameters Menu  
↓2  
IP Host  
IP HOST ( Device name - FCD-IPM)  
-------  
CURRENT  
NEW  
-------  
---  
1. IP address  
2. IP mask  
010.000.000.027  
255.000.000.000  
000.000.000.000  
010.000.000.027  
255.000.000.000  
000.000.000.000  
3. Default gateway  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-6. IP Host Menu  
5-4  
Host Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Table 5-2. IP Host Parameters  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
IP Address  
Class A  
1.0.0.0 to 127.255.255.255,  
Every device on a TCP/IP network must have an address  
for identification. The IP address is a value consisting of  
the network address and the host address on that  
network. The value assigned to a network depends on  
the number of computers on that network.  
The IP address is a 32-bit number. The number is made  
up of 4 parts, with each part consisting of 3 digits. One  
part of the address identifies the network and another  
part of the address identifies the host. The numbers in  
the address, which identify the host, are dependent on  
the class.  
Class B  
128.0.0.0 to 191.255.255.255,  
Class C  
192.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255,  
Class D  
224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255,  
Class E  
240.0.0.0 to 247.255.255.255  
There are 5 classes of IP addresses. Each class represents  
a network having a certain number of computers. For  
example, a Class C address is given to a network having  
between 1 to 255 computers.  
The numbers in each part of the code are translated  
into binary code, which identifies the network and the  
host.  
IP addresses are assigned by the Internet Network  
Information Center (InterNIC). InterNIC assigns the  
network ID. Host IDs are assigned by the network  
administrator.  
IP Mask  
Default IP mask for Class A  
255.0.0.0  
A subnet is a portion of a network that shares a  
common address component. On TCP/IP networks,  
subnets are defined as all devices whose IP addresses  
have the same prefix. For example, all devices whose IP  
addresses begin with 133.100.100. are part of the same  
subnet. An IP mask allows you to filter IP addresses on a  
subnet. When an IP address is configured, the IP mask is  
automatically configured according to the Class of the IP  
Network.  
Default IP mask for Class B  
255.255.0.0  
Default IP mask for Class C  
255.255.255.0  
Default IP mask for Class D  
255.255.255.225  
Note: The default IP mask can be edited.  
Default Gateway  
The default gateway defines where frames will be sent,  
if no explicit routing is defined in the routing table.  
The default gateway can be an IP address or a WAN  
interface. If you choose to use an IP address, enter the  
address of the router that will deliver the frames.  
Specifying an IP address for the default gateway is done  
with shared media, such as LAN interface.  
If you choose to use a WAN interface, the connection  
to the router is point-to-point. Choose by interface and  
enter the interface/DLCI number.  
Host Parameters Menu  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
FCD-IPM  
Internet  
LAN Interface IP address  
should be Default Gateway  
for all stations on LAN  
Central Access  
Router  
Figure 5-7. Default Gateway  
Note  
It is very important to obtain the correct parameters from the system administrator  
or ISP. The most common problem when establishing an IP connection is incorrect  
configuration of the IP parameters and default gateway. Do not try to guess these  
parameters.  
SNMP Manager Table  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓1  
Host Parameters Menu  
↓3  
SNMP Manager Table  
MANAGER TABLE SETTING ( Device name - FCD-IPM)  
---------------------  
IP address  
Mask  
1. 010.000.000.222  
Yes  
OPTIONS: C-Clear all, E-Edit, D-Delete, A-Add  
Press one of the above or ESC to return to previous screen:  
Figure 5-8. SNMP Manager Table Menu  
Select this option to add, clear or delete parameters from the manager table. The  
manager table lists the SNMP manager IP addresses and masks. Simple Network  
Management Protocol (SNMP) manager IP address is the IP of the management  
station, which the traps are sent to (NMS). To send traps to that NMS, set the mask  
parameter to YES.  
SNMP is an application-layer protocol designed to facilitate the exchange of  
management information between network devices. By using SNMP to access  
management information data (such as packets per second and network error  
rates), network administrators can more easily manage network performance and  
find and solve network problems.  
5-6  
Host Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol)  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓1  
Host Parameters Menu  
↓4  
TFTP  
TFTP (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
1. Retransmission timeout (seconds): 15  
2. Total timeout (seconds)  
: 60  
Press the number to edit value or ESC to return to the previous screen:  
Figure 5-9. TFTP Menu  
TFTP is a simple file transfer protocol running over IP that permits unsecured and  
unauthorized file exchange over the Internet/Intranet. TFTP is widely used to  
upgrade software and configuration parameters for various standalone units. TFTP  
is a client-server type protocol; FCD-IPM operates as the TFTP client. In order to  
use the TFTP-based features of FCD-IPM you need TFTP server software running  
on some of your PCs.  
This screen permits you to configure common TFTP session parameters that are  
used for software upgrades and upload/download features.  
Table 5-3. TFTP Parameters  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
Retransmission  
Timeout  
For example:  
30 seconds  
The amount of time that is allowed to pass before the last  
non-acknowledged request is transmitted.  
Total Timeout  
For example:  
60 seconds.  
The amount of time FCD-IPM should wait for an acknowledgment  
from the TFTP server in case a frame is lost, or there are other  
problems.  
TFTP Server  
IP Address: 192.168.10.11  
Stores file at C:\booting\boot.exe  
File  
Transfer  
FCD-IPM  
TFTP Client  
Figure 5-10. File Transfer to and from TFTP Server  
Host Parameters Menu  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
RADIUS (Authentication and Billing)  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓1  
Host Parameters Menu  
↓5  
RADIUS  
RADIUS (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
1. Radius server IP Address  
2. Radius authenticator  
:
:
3. Radius accounting status  
: [Disable]  
4. Radius authentication UDP port : 1812  
5. Radius accounting UDP port : 1813  
6. Retransmission timeout (seconds): 15  
7. Total timeout (seconds) : 60  
Press the number to edit value or ESC to return to the previous screen:  
Figure 5-11. RADIUS Menu  
The RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) is a client/server  
security protocol. Security information is stored in a central location, known as the  
RADIUS server. RADIUS clients, such as FCD-IPM, communicate with the RADIUS  
server to authenticate users. Although the term RADIUS refers to the network  
protocol that the client and server use to communicate, it is often used to refer to  
the entire client/server system.  
The three main functions of RADIUS are:  
•
•
•
Authentication  
Authorization  
Accounting.  
To perform these functions, you must configure the parameters described in  
Table 5-4.  
5-8  
Host Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Table 5-4. RADIUS Menu Parameters  
Possible Values Description  
Parameters  
RADIUS Server IP  
Address  
The IP address of the RADIUS server, for example 192.168.1.9.  
RADIUS  
Authenticator  
Enter the shared secret. The shared secret is a password used by RADIUS  
to authenticate the client. It is important to remember that the client is  
FCD-IPM. Do not supply the shared secret.  
Note: When configuring the RADIUS Authenticator, be sure to use the  
same value in the RADIUS server and FCD-IPM.  
RADIUS  
Accounting Status  
Enable  
Disable  
Track link up/link down activity. This information is often used for billing  
purposes.  
RADIUS  
Authentication  
Port  
Selects the UDP port number to be used for the RADIUS authentication  
application. Confirm that the same value is defined in the RADIUS server  
RADIUS  
Accounting Port  
Selects the UDP port number to be used by the RADIUS accounting  
application. Confirm that the same value is defined in the RADIUS server  
Retransmission  
Timeout  
The maximum time FCD-IPM waits for a single request response from the  
RADIUS server, for example 30 seconds. After this time the request will  
be retransmitted.  
Total Timeout  
The total time FCD-IPM tries to communicate with the RADIUS server  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
5.2 Routing/Bridging Menu  
Select this option to enter FCD-IPM routing information.  
Advanced  
Menu  
1
Setup  
2
2
Device  
Control  
Routing/Bridging  
1
2
3
4
5
Interface  
Routing/  
Bridging Mode  
Static  
IP Routing  
Settings  
IPX Routing  
Settings  
Station  
Aging  
Stations & Nets  
1. Interface  
Address  
1. Link Type  
Add  
2. Routing  
Protocol  
Clear All  
2. Link Protocol  
3. Maximum  
Transmit Unit  
3. Link Cost/  
Metric  
Delete  
4. DHCP Relay  
4. PPP Settings  
5. IP Addresses  
Pool Setting  
1. Header and Control  
Field Compression  
2. Protocol Field  
Compression  
6. PC Remote  
Access  
3. IP Compression  
7. OSPF Setup  
4. Data Negotiation  
Compression Mode  
5. Multilink  
Figure 5-12. Routing Menu Outline  
To access the Routing/Bridging menu:  
ꢀ
1. In the Advanced Menu, press 1.  
The Setup menu appears.  
2. In the Setup menu, press 2.  
The Routing/Bridging menu appears.  
5-10  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
ROUTING/BRIDGING ( Device name - FCD-IPM)  
Link 1 - IP & IPX ROUTER PPP  
Setup Menu  
1. Interface Routing Bridging Mode  
2. Static stations & nets  
3. IP routing settings  
4. IPX routing settings  
5. Station aging (minutes): 60  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-13. Routing/Bridging menu  
The options in the Routing/Bridging menu are described below.  
Interface Routing/Bridging Mode  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓2  
Routing/Bridging  
↓1  
Interface Routing/Bridging  
ROUTING MODE: LINK 1 ( Device name - FCD-IPM)  
1. Link type  
- IP Router  
- PPP  
2. Link protocol  
3. Link cost/metric - 1  
4. PPP settings  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-14. Interface Routing Bridging Mode Menu  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
To perform these functions, you must configure the parameters in Table 5-5.  
Table 5-5. Interface Routing/Bridging Mode Menu Parameters  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Bridge  
Description  
Link/LAN Type  
Assigns the link/LAN type, for each interface. Use the space bar to  
toggle between the options  
IP Router  
IPX Router  
Any combination of  
these types  
Link Protocol  
Protocols For  
Synchronus Links:  
Defines the type of encapsulation while sending frames through  
the WAN interface. The settings are different for various link  
types.  
PPP  
Native  
Note: When the Native protocol is used with a Router, protocol  
packets pass in HDLC format.  
When the Native protocol is used with a Bridge, MAC frames pass  
in HDLC format.  
Protocols For  
Asynchronus Links:  
PPP  
SLIP  
CSLIP  
Link Cost/Metric  
Assigns a cost to each WAN link for routing purposes. This  
parameter affects FCD-IPM’s operation of the corresponding  
interface configured to use RIP routing protocol.  
Each routing entry is accompanied by a metric, which is the  
number of routers through which a packet must go to get to its  
destination.  
Before updating routing tables, FCD-IPM adds link cost value to  
all routing metrics received from this link; this may affect further  
routing decisions.  
A router will automatically send packets using the lowest possible  
metric. If a router is not functioning, FCD-IPM will send the  
packets through an interface with a higher metric.  
5-12  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
PPP Settings  
This option is only available for PPP link protocol.  
Table 5-6. PPP Settings  
Possible Values Description  
Parameters  
Header and  
Control Field  
Compression  
Yes, No  
Used for troubleshooting only. Change the Header and Control Field  
Compression setting only if there is a problem with PPP negotiation  
Protocol Field  
Compression  
Yes, No  
Yes, No  
Used for troubleshooting only. Change the Protocol Field Compression  
setting only if there is a problem with PPP negotiation  
IP Compression  
Activates Van Jacobson TCP Header Compression on a specified link.  
PPP is often used on slow bandwidth links, such as modems. To make  
the transmission faster, certain parts of the data packets can be  
compressed.  
In Van Jacobson TCP Header Compression the TCP/IP packet header is  
compressed according to RRC 1144. Other protocols running over IP  
(for example, UDP, ICMP) are not affected by using Van Jacobson  
compression. Since PPP is used for point to point transmissions, both  
the local and remote devices must have Van Jacobson TCP Header  
Compression enabled for compression to be performed. To verify that  
Van Jacobson TCP Header Compression is being performed, open the  
Interface Connections Screen  
Multilink  
Determines if a line supports multilink PPP (RFC 1990 compliant).  
The line does not support multilink PPP  
Disabled  
Enabled  
BOD  
The line supports multilink PPP  
The line enables multilink PPP with Bandwidth-on-Demand support  
(for ISDN line only).  
Permitting multilink PPP means that two neighboring links (or two  
ISDN B-channels) will work as a single logical channel, thereby  
increasing the total link bandwidth. If you select Permanent, then both  
links will be connected simultaneously, independent of bandwidth  
utilization. Using BOD permits you to be connected most of the time  
with only one B-channel and to be connected with the second channel  
for small periods of high bandwidth utilization. This method reduces  
connection costs.  
If you choose BOD, then configure the following parameters:  
Sensibility Direction and Sensibility Timeout.  
BOD Sensibility  
Direction  
Transmit,  
Receive, Both  
Defines the traffic direction to be counted in determining whether to  
connect the second line.  
BOD Sensibility  
Timeout  
Defines the time interval for the utilization count  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Static Stations and Nets  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓2  
Routing/Bridging  
↓2  
Static Stations and Nets  
STATIC STATIONS AND NETS(MAC, IP, IPX) (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
1. IP - 192.168.182.056 mask-255.255.255.248 interface-2/16 cost-1  
2. IPX - 25490880  
interface-3  
cost-1  
A - Add , C - Clear all , D - Delete  
ESC - Return to previous menu.  
Figure 5-15. Adding Static Stations and Nets  
Select this parameter to add, delete, or clear static entries in the IP/IPX Routing  
table or Bridge Routing table. If FCD-IPM is attached to more than one LAN, then  
select this parameter for each LAN interface, if necessary. The Aging Mechanism  
does not remove static entries from the routing tables.  
When adding static entries in the IP/IPX Routing table or Bridge Routing table, they  
can be defined in 4 ways (see Table 5-7).  
Table 5-7. Static Stations and Nets  
Parameters  
Description  
MAC Station  
MAC Station defines a single static entry in the Bridge routing table. The entry is a single  
MAC Address (6 bytes) entered in hexadecimal format.  
IP Net  
IP Net defines a network as the destination. IP Net consists of 3 parts:  
Destination – defined by entering the subnet IP address and IP mask.  
For example, 192.168.182.32 is a subnet IP address and 255.255.255.240 is the IP  
mask.  
Frame pathway – specified either as an interface (i.e. port) number or as Next Hop IP  
address. In Next Hop IP the frames are sent to another router; from there they will be  
sent to their final destination (see Figure 5-16).  
Cost – used only for advertising via routing protocols.  
The values are 1 to 15.  
5-14  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Table 5-7. Static Stations and Nets (Cont.)  
Parameters  
Description  
IP-Station  
Defines a single host as the destination. IP Station consists of 3 parts:  
Destination - defined by entering the host IP address; for example, 192.168.182.11  
Frame pathway - specified as in IP Net, above.  
Cost – used only for advertising via routing protocols.  
The values are 1 to 15.  
IPX Net  
Used for IPX routing. Defines the IPX Net in hexadecimal and the interface number.  
Cost – used only for advertising via routing protocols.  
The values are 1 to 15.  
Internet  
ISP Router  
WAN  
FCD-IPM  
Router 2  
IP Net 1  
IP Net 2  
Figure 5-16. Router 2 set to “Next Hop” in FCD-IPM  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
IP Routings Settings  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓2  
Routing/Bridging  
↓3  
IP Routings Settings  
IP ROUTING SETTINGS ( Device name - FCD-IPM)  
1. Interface address  
2. Routing Protocol  
3. Maximum transmit unit  
4. DHCP relay  
5. IP address pool setting  
6. PC remote access  
7. OSPF Setup  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-17. IP Routing Settings  
Interface Address  
Select this parameter to enter an IP address for the WAN interface and one or  
more IP addresses for the LAN interface. Multiple IP addresses on the LAN are  
useful in environments with multiple IP nets on the LAN (refer to Figure 5-18). If  
your FCD-IPM setup has two LAN interfaces use this screen to enter one or more  
IP addresses for the second LAN.  
WAN  
WAN IP Address  
FCD-IPM  
LAN IP Address  
IP Net 1  
IP Net 2  
Figure 5-18. WAN and LAN Interface Addresses  
5-16  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Routing Protocol  
This parameter sets the type of routing advertisement protocol to be used for each  
FCD-IPM interface (LANs and WANs).  
If FCD-IPM is configured as a RIP router, it sends/receives information from its  
routing table to/from corresponding router(s), learning its environment  
dynamically.  
Table 5-8. Routing Protocol Settings  
Values  
RIP1  
Description  
Sends and receives routing information about IP nets only  
Sends and receives full routing information, including subnets  
RIP2  
RIP1+2  
Sends information as for RIP2 (full routing information, including  
subnets), and receive both RIP1 and RIP2 (routing information about IP  
nets only)  
OSPF  
None  
Uses Open Shortest Path First protocol  
FCD-IPM will not negotiate routing information with neighboring  
routers  
Maximum Transmit Unit  
This parameter sets the maximum transmit unit (MTU) for IP fragmentation. Set the  
MTU for each interface (LANs and WANs). If a frame is larger than the MTU, it will  
be fragmented into smaller units, while it is sent through the specified interface.  
DHCP Relay  
This parameter enables transmission of DHCP requests to specified IP addresses  
via WAN and LAN links.  
IP Address Pool Setting (DHCP)  
This parameter determines the option for how FCD-IPM assigns IP addresses  
dynamically to connected workstations. FCD-IPM uses one of the following  
mechanisms to assign IP addresses dynamically to workstations:  
Table 5-9. IP Address Pool Setting (DHCP)  
Values  
Description  
IPCP  
Negotiations  
This is a mechanism where the remote router or a workstation  
connected to FCD-IPM via a link requests an IP address. This request is  
made by specifying zero for the IP address in the IPCP configure  
request (PPP).  
BOOTP  
This is a method where another router or workstation sends an  
affirmation for an IP address. FCD-IPM uses BOOTP to confirm the IP  
address by sending a BOOTP reply packet via a link or LAN. FCD-IPM  
using BOOTP supports basic options only.  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Table 5-9. IP Address Pool Setting (DHCP) (Cont.)  
Values  
DHCP  
Description  
This protocol is an extension to BOOTP and permits FCD-IPM to  
supply not only an IP address but also additional parameters, such as  
Default Gateway, DNS server addresses etc. FCD-IPM supplies these  
parameters to the client's workstation. In contrast to BOOTP, DHCP  
supplies these parameters on a temporary basis. FCD-IPM using DHCP  
checks on the workstation periodically. If the workstation is not using  
the IP address, the IP address can be supplied to other workstations  
later.  
FCD-IPM supports all these mechanisms simultaneously.  
IP Address Pool  
Select this option to define IP address information.  
IP ADDRESS POOL (Device name FCD-IPM)  
----------------  
Pool of IP addresses dynamically allocated by the device working as Remote  
Access server or DHCP server to workstations over the WAN/LAN.  
Allocation can be made via DHCP, BOOTP, and PPP-IPCP request.  
1. IP Address 001.001.001.001 – 001.001.001.005 Mask: 255.255.255.000  
Default gateway: 001.001.001.001  
Primary DNS: 194.090.001.005, Secondary DNS: 000.000.000.000  
Interface: LAN 1  
OPTIONS: C-Clear all, E-Edit, D-Delete, A-Add  
Press one of the above or ESC to return to previous screen:  
Figure 5-19. IP Address Pool Menu  
You can define up to five entries. Each entry contains the parameters shown in  
Table 5-10.  
5-18  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Table 5-10. IP Address Pool Settings  
Parameters  
Description  
Low IP Address  
Lower boundary of the IP address range  
High IP Address Upper boundary of the IP address range  
IP Mask  
IP mask for the IP address range (for DHCP and BOOTP)  
Default  
Gateway  
Default Gateway IP address for workstations which receive IP addresses  
from the range defined by the Low IP Address and High IP Address.  
The Default Gateway IP address must be within this IP address range  
(used by DHCP only).  
Primary DNS  
IP address of the DNS server, which can be used by the workstation  
(for DHCP and IPCP).  
Secondary DNS Additional DNS server address that is an alternative to the Primary DNS  
(for DHCP and IPCP).  
Interface  
Determines which requests to the IP address can be accepted. You can  
determine the interface by toggling between WAN, LAN (any LAN or  
specifically 2 LAN interface units), and ALL (both WAN and LAN).  
PC Remote Access  
Select this parameter to define the remote access. The PC Remote Access Option  
is important if FCD-IPM is used as a remote access server for remote PCs accessing  
the LAN. Refer to Figure 5-20.  
PC Remote Access (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
1. Shared IP net - 192.168.1.1  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
mask - 255.255.255.240  
Figure 5-20. PC Remote Access  
Shared IP Net  
Select this parameter to enter the Shared IP net address. The Shared IP net address  
is used by all remote workstations that connect to the remote access server on the  
WAN links.  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
OSPF Settings  
Select this option to configure the parameters for the Open Shortest Path First  
(OSPF) protocol. The OSPF Protocol is a dynamic routing protocol that detects  
topological changes in the AS and calculates new loop-free routes after a short  
period of convergence with minimal routing traffic.  
Note  
Configure at least one of the IP router interfaces for OSPF routing protocol. This is  
performed from the Routing Protocol menu.  
OSPF SETTINGS ( Device name - FCD-IPM  
)
1. OSPF routing status  
2. Router ID  
[Enable ]  
: 209.227.164.065  
[Static only ]  
3. Redistribute routes from  
4. Interfaces area ID  
5. Advanced interfaces setup  
6. Areas setup  
7. Summarization setup  
Choose one of the above or press ESC to return to previous menu :  
Figure 5-21. OSPF Settings Menu  
Table 5-11. OSPF Settings  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Enable  
Description  
OSPF  
Enables or disables the OSPF option  
Disable  
Router ID  
Configure router ID. According to RFC-2328 it  
is often set to be equal to the smallest IP  
address of router interfaces. We require  
configuring it explicitly, because changing its  
value must restart OSPF software. The better  
way is to change it together with enabling OSPF  
Redistribute  
routes from  
Nothing  
Static Only  
RIP Only  
Static & RIP  
Interfaces area  
ID  
Configures the area ID for OSPF interfaces. It  
has the same logic as link routing protocol  
5-20  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
INTERFACES AREA ID ( Device name - FCD-IPM  
)
1. LINK 1/CH1 Area ID: 001.001.001.001  
2. LINK 1/CH2 Area ID:  
3. LINK 2  
4. LAN 1  
Area ID: 002.002.002.002  
Area ID: 000.000.000.001  
Press the number to edit value or ESC to return to the previous screen:  
Figure 5-22. Interfaces area ID  
Advanced Interfaces Setup  
Parameters described in this section are used for fine-tuning of OSPF interfaces  
configuration.  
OSPF ADVANCED INTERFACES SETUP ( Device name - FCD-IPM  
------------------------------  
)
Interface  
1. LAN1  
Prty Hello int. Dead int. Metric  
30 50  
3
2
OPTIONS: A-Add  
Press one of the above or ESC to return to previous screen:  
Figure 5-23. Interfaces area ID  
Areas Setup  
This group defines parameters that may be different for different areas.  
OSPF AREAS SETUP ( Device name - FCD-IPM  
----------------  
)
Area  
Type  
1. 010.001.036.000 Stub  
OPTIONS: C-Clear all, E-Edit, D-Delete, A-Add  
Press one of the above or ESC to return to previous screen:  
Figure 5-24. OSPF Areas Setup  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Table 5-12. OSPF Areas Setup  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
Area  
0.0.0.0. to  
255.255.255.255  
Type  
Normal  
Stub  
Accepts all types of OSPF traffic (Standard Area)  
Accepts all types of OSPF traffic, except  
AS-external-LSA’s (type 5 LSAs)  
NSSA  
Not-So-Stubby-Area – a stub area that connects  
to an external AS  
OSPF Summaries Setup  
To reduce the number of LSAs advertised, it’s common practice in OSPF to  
configure IP subnets in contiguous manner and to define subnet summarization. It  
means that the area border router will try to aggregate various subnets it learned in  
one area before advertising it in another area.  
OSPF SUMMARIES SETUP ( Device name - FCD-IPM )  
--------------------  
Area  
Ip  
Mask  
Advert.  
1. 010.001.036.000 010.001.037.000 255.255.255.000  
2. 010.001.036.000 010.002.037.000 255.255.255.000  
Yes  
Yes  
OPTIONS: C-Clear all, E-Edit, D-Delete, A-Add  
Press one of the above or ESC to return to previous screen:  
Figure 5-25. OSPF Summaries Setup  
5-22  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
IPX Routing Settings  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓2  
Routing/Bridging  
↓4  
IPX Routings Settings  
IPX ROUTING SETTINGS (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
--------------------  
1. LAN IPX net for frame type 802.3  
- 00000000  
2. LAN IPX net for frame type Ethernet II - 00000000  
3. LAN IPX net for frame type 802.2  
4. LAN IPX net for frame type SNAP  
5. Dial-in IPX net  
- 00000000  
- 00000000  
- D2162747  
- [Enable]  
6. Autolearn of zero LAN IPX nets  
7. RIP/SAP mode  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-26. IPX Routing Settings  
Select this parameter to specify parameters required for operating FCD-IPM as an  
IPX router.  
Table 5-13. IPX Routing Settings  
Parameters  
Possible Values Description  
LAN IPX Net for  
Frame Type  
Each of these parameters specifies the IPX Nets associated with a  
particular frame type. If FCD-IPM is in Autolearn enable mode, then  
non-zero values point to learned Net. FCD-IPM supplies default values  
for these frame types that can be configured on PC's operating on LANs  
without other IPX routing.  
Dial-in IPX Net  
Specifies the IPX Net definition for a WAN interface  
Autolearn Zero  
LAN IPX Nets  
Enable  
By setting this parameter to Enable, FCD-IPM learns IPX Nets from  
RIP/SAP frames sent by other IPX routers on the same LAN. Refer to  
Figure 5-27. If there are no other IPX routers on FCD-IPM LAN, this  
parameter must be set to Disable, and you must configure the IPX Nets  
for each frame type.  
Disable  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
IPX Frames  
IPX Frames  
FCD-IPM  
IPX Frames  
IPX Router  
IPX Router  
Figure 5-27. Automatic Learning from IPX Frames  
RIP/SAP Mode  
RIP / SAP MODE SETUP (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
1. Link 1 RIP/SAP mode: [Enabled]  
2. LAN  
RIP/SAP mode: [Enabled]  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-28. RIP/SAP Mode Setup  
Link 1 RIP/SAP Mode  
Select this parameter to Enable/Disable the RIP/SAP mode. The default setting  
enables sending RIP and SAP tables for all updates and interfaces (Link and LAN).  
When disabled FCD-IPM does not send RIP/SAP frames, but receives and  
processes RIP/SAP frames sent from other routers.  
5-24  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Station Ageing  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓2  
Routing/Bridging  
↓5  
Station Ageing  
AGEING ( Device name - FCD-IPM )  
------  
Enter ageing time for stations learned by Remote  
Access Server.  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Current station ageing  
(minutes): 60  
New stations ageing (1- 255 minutes):  
Figure 5-29. Station Aging Menu  
Station aging determines the amount of time a station is allowed to be inactive  
before it is removed from the network. A station is inactive when no traffic from it  
is received by the FCD-IPM LAN interface. This parameter is used in IP routing  
mode for ARP table aging and in bridge mode for MAC station table aging. Static  
stations are not removed by the aging mechanism.  
The default aging time is 60 minutes.  
Routing/Bridging Menu  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
5.3 Interface Parameters Menu  
Select this option to set general parameters and link, Frame Relay, ISDN or E1/T1  
parameters.  
The Interface Parameters menu is dynamic, depending on the hardware  
configuration. Only those screens / parameters that are applicable to your interface  
will appear.  
Advanced Menu  
1
Setup  
3
2
Interface Parameters  
Device Control  
1
4
5
2
3
Frame  
Relay  
Settings  
Link  
Settings  
ISDN  
Settings  
SHDSL  
Settings  
E1/T1  
Settings  
1. SHDSL  
Parameters  
1. Clock  
Master  
1. Status  
2. Type  
1. Line Mode  
2. Multiplier  
2. Standard  
3. PSD  
3. Time Slots  
Mapping  
3. Connection  
Type  
1. Asynchronous  
2.Synchronous  
4. General  
Diagnostics  
4. SNR Margin  
4. Connection  
Timeout (sec)  
5. E1/T1  
Parameters  
5. SNR Margin  
Threshhold  
3. Frame Relay  
5. Control  
Signals Mode  
6. Additional  
Cards Parameters  
6. Loop Attenuation  
Threshhold  
7. Alarms  
Filter  
6. Clock  
Rate  
2. SHDSL  
Loops  
8. Advanced  
Setup  
Figure 5-30. Interface Parameters Menu Outline  
ꢀ
To access the Interface Parameters menu:  
1. In the Advanced Menu, press 1.  
The Setup menu appears.  
2. In the Setup menu, press 3.  
The Interface Parameters menu appears.  
5-26  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
INTERFACE PARAMETERS (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
1. Link settings  
2. SHDSL settings  
3. E1, T1, voice settings  
4. ISDN settings  
5. Frame relay settings  
ESC - return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-31. Interface Parameters  
The options in the Interface Parameters menu are described below.  
Link Settings Menu  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓3  
Interface Parameters Menu  
↓1  
Link Settings Menu  
INTERFACE PARAMETERS ( Device name - 27 )  
1. Link settings  
2. E1, T1, voice settings  
Press number to select or ESC to return to the previous menu:  
Figure 5-32. Link Settings Menu  
The Link Settings Menu lists parameters that are specific to the line hardware. The  
Menu is dynamic, depending on which hardware interface and protocol you have  
ordered.  
The parameters that follow apply to all link types.  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Table 5-14. Link Settings  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Enabled  
Description  
Status  
Transmits frames. Normally you want all links in enabled status  
Disabled  
Does not transmit frames. The link may be permanently  
disabled, for example, when testing. A disabled line freezes all  
link operation, including connection attempts and forwarding.  
Backup  
If a link is defined as backup to another, then whenever the  
main link operates normally, the backup link is disabled. If the  
main link fails, the backup link begins to operate and become  
enabled. You must that the routing settings are correct so that  
traffic will be forwarded to the desired destination via the  
backup link. When you restore the main link connection, the  
backup link becomes disabled again.  
Type  
Synchronous  
Asynchronous  
Data bits are transmitted at a fixed rate, because the sender and  
the receiver are synchronized  
Units of data are sent one character at a time. Characters are  
preceded by start bits and followed by stop bits, which provide  
synchronization at the receive terminal.  
Frame Relay  
A packet-switching protocol for connecting devices on a WAN  
If the link is to be used to connect to the Internet or Intranet  
If the link is to be used for receiving remote access connection  
Connection Type Originate only  
Answer only  
Answer & Originate If the link is to be used for both incoming and out going  
connections (not simultaneously)  
Note: This parameter only affects dial-up link types  
(asynchronous with modem or ISDN). For leased-line links,select  
Answer-only.  
Connection  
Timeout (sec)  
Specifies the connection timeout. The remote side has to answer  
within the time allotted with the Connection Timeout. If within  
this time there is no response, you are informed that the remote  
side is no longer active.  
This is meaningful only if the link is configured for PPP protocol.  
Note: Connection timeout is only configured when the PPP  
protcol is used.  
Control Signals  
Mode  
ON, Ignore  
Determines whether the control signals are ignored or  
acknowledged by link hardware  
Baud Rate  
Specifies the rate at which data is sent across the link  
Note: For Synchronous and Asynchronous DCE links only.  
5-28  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Table 5-14. Link Settings (Cont.)  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Odd  
Description  
Parity  
Specifies the parity. Parity is a method of checking for errors. A  
parity bit is a non-information bit that is added to a group of bits  
to ensure that the total number of bits in a character is odd or  
even. If you know that the total number of bits must be odd any  
group of bits whose total number is even must be erroneous.  
Even  
None  
Note: For Asynchronous links only.  
Stop Bit  
1, 2  
Specifies the stop bit quantity. The stop bit is a signal at the end  
of a character that instructs a receiving device to wait for a  
subsequent signal.  
Note: For Asynchronous links only.  
Modem Settings  
Displays a menu which allows configuration of modem  
parameters.  
Note: For Asynchronous links only.  
SHDSL Settings  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓3  
Interface Parameters Menu  
↓2  
SHDSL Settings  
SHDSL SETTINGS (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
--------------  
1. SHDSL parameters  
2. SHDSL loops  
ESC - return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-33. SHDSL Settings Menu  
SHDSL link is used to transport E1 data. The SHDSL rate is always fixed, it is  
determined by the number of E1 timeslots assigned to carry data (including  
timeslot 0 and timeslot 16).  
FCD-IPM can be configured to operate as an STU-C (central) or STU-R (remote)  
device.  
When configured as STU-C SHDSL rate is fixed (according to the number of E1  
timeslots carrying data). When configured as STU-R, the SHDSL rate is adaptive.  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
SHDSL Parameters  
SHDSL parameters of FCD-IPM can be configured via SHDSL Parameters menu.  
ꢀ
To configure the SHDSL parameters:  
1. From the SHDSL Settings menu appears (see Figure 5-33), type 1.  
The SHDSL Parameters menu appears (see Figure 5-34).  
2. Type 1 to 6 to toggle between available values of the following parameters:  
Note  
When selecting line mode of FCD-IPM with SHDSL interface, you must also specify  
appropriate E1 master timing:  
•
•
STU-C mode – Internal or Sublink 1 (for FCD-IPM units with sublink)  
STU-R mode – Link 1.  
SHDSL Parameters (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
----------------  
1. Line Mode  
2. Standard  
3. PSD  
: [STU-R]  
: [Annex B]  
: [Symmetric]  
: [0 dB]  
4. SNR Margin  
5. SNR Margin Threshold : 0  
6. Loop Attn. Threshold : 0  
Press the number to edit or ESC to return to the previous screen  
Figure 5-34. SHDSL Parameters Menu  
Table 5-15. SHDSL Parameters  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
Line Mode  
Operation mode of FCD-IPM with SHDSL interface:  
Central Office  
STU-C  
STU-R  
Customer Premises  
Standard  
Annex A/B  
SHDSL standard compatibility (Annex A or Annex B)  
5-30  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Table 5-15. SHDSL Parameters (Cont.)  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
PSD  
Power spectral density, amount of power applied to the  
spectrum of frequencies that carry the information signal in  
order to achieve a satisfactory level of signal strength at the  
receiving end of the circuit  
Symmetric  
Supported in both Annex A and Annex B modes  
Asymmetric  
Supported in Annex A at 768 kbps and in Annex B at 2048 kbps  
SNR Margin  
Signal-to-noise margin (in dB)  
SNR Margin  
Threshold  
0 dB to 15 dB  
Signal-to-noise ratio threshold. FCD-IPM sends trap, if the signal-  
to-noise ratio on the line exceeds the threshold value  
Loop Attn.  
Threshold  
0 dB to 127 dB  
Loop attenuation is difference (in dB) between the power  
transmitted from FCD-IPM and the power received by the unit  
operating at the other side of the application. By setting the  
threshold, you instruct the FCD-IPM to generate a trap, if  
selected loop attenuation threshold value is exceeded.  
SHDSL Loops  
FCD-IPM supports activation of local and remote loopbacks. The loopbacks are  
activated via the SHDSL Loops menu.  
ꢀ
To access the SHDSL Loops menu:  
•
From the SHDSL Settings menu appears (see Figure 5-33), type 2.  
The SHDSL Loops menu appears (see Figure 5-35).  
SHDSL LOOPS (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
1. Local unit loop : [Disabled  
]
Press the number to edit or ESC to return to the previous screen  
Figure 5-35. SHDSL Loops Menu  
Table 5-16. SHDSL Loops  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Disabled  
Description  
Local unit loop  
FCD-IPM operates normally, all loopbacks are disabled  
Local Loopback  
In this mode, the data transmitted from FCD-IPM to the E1  
interface is sent back to the received path (see Figure 5-36). The  
SHDSL link is down when the local loopback is active  
Remote Loopback  
In this mode, FCD-IPM performs a loopback and transmits back  
the data that was received from the SHDSL line  
(see Figure 5-37). SHDSL link remains operative, when the  
remote loopback is running  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
FCD-IPM  
E1 Interface  
SHDSL Interface  
Loopback  
Figure 5-36. Local Loopback  
FCD-IPM  
E1 Interface  
SHDSL Interface  
E1  
Service  
Loopback  
Figure 5-37. Remote Loopback  
.
Note  
•
Make sure that the SHDSL link is operating properly before running the remote  
loopback.  
•
Do not activate local loopback from the E1 Setup menu, when FCD-IPM is  
equipped with E1 over SHDSL interface.  
E1/T1 Settings  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓3  
Interface Parameters Menu  
↓2  
E1/T1 Settings Menu  
Select this option to configure the E1 or T1 parameters. The T1 parameters are  
described in the T1 Setup Menu section on page 5-35 and the E1 parameters are  
described in the E1 Setup Menu section on page 5-51.  
FCD-IPM is an integrated router/bridge with E1/T1 and fractional E1/T1 services.  
FCD-IPM is available in several options (refer to Figure 5-38, Figure 5-39 and  
Figure 5-40)  
For Example:  
•
•
•
•
•
T1  
T1 with sublink  
E1  
E1 with sublink  
E1 or T1 with analog voice ports.  
5-32  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
For the I/O Data Channel slots, additional card options are available. Refer to  
Chapter 1.  
FCD-IPM  
Router/Bridge  
Link1  
E1/T1  
Service  
Figure 5-38. FCD-IPM with an E1/T1 Interface  
FCD-IPM (E1/T1 with Sub Link)  
Router/Bridge  
Link1  
E1/T1  
Service  
Sub Link  
E1/T1 Service  
or PABX  
Figure 5-39. FCD-IPM with an E1/T1 Interface and Sublink  
FCD-IPM (E1/T1 with Analog Voice Ports)  
Router/Bridge  
Link1  
E1/T1  
Service  
Voice  
Card  
Figure 5-40. FCD-IPM with an E1/T1 Interface and Analog Voice Ports  
FCD-IPM with sublink provides a drop & insert capability. The drop & insert  
capability enables multiplexing of data from the local router/bridge, and voice from  
the local PABX, to the E1/T1 main link. The I/O Data channels function with the  
same logic.  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
T1 Features  
•
•
Nominal rate - 1.544 Mbps  
Data rates are multiples of 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps (N x 56 Kbps or N x 64 Kbps,  
N = 1 - 24)  
•
•
Time slot assignment is user selectable  
Link interface includes integral CSU/DSU depending on user configuration of  
the transmit level, 0 to -22.5 dB for Channel Service Unit (CSU) or 0-655 feet  
for Data Service Unit (DSU)  
•
•
•
•
Framing modes: Super Frame (SF (D4)) or Extended Super Frame (ESF)  
Line code: Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI)  
Zero suppression modes: B8ZS, B7ZS or transparent  
Master system clock:  
ꢀ Internal oscillator  
ꢀ Recovered from the link 1 received data  
ꢀ Recovered from the sublink received data (for FCD-IPM with a Sublink).  
Variety of Loopback possibilities:  
•
•
ꢀ Network activated loopbacks (PLB, LLB)  
ꢀ Facility Data Link (FDL) loopbacks  
ꢀ User-configurable local or remote loopbacks.  
Extended Super Frame (ESF) diagnostic for previous 24 hours collected in  
15-minute intervals (according to the AT&T PUB 54016).  
E1 Features  
•
•
Nominal rate - 2.048 Mbps  
Data rates are multiples of 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps (N x 56 kbps or  
N x 64 kbps, N = 1…31)  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Time slot assignment is user selectable  
E1 interface with or without LTU  
Interfaces: balanced or unbalanced  
Framing modes: G732N and G732S  
Optional Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC-4)  
Line code: HDB3  
Master system clock:  
ꢀ Internal oscillator  
ꢀ Recovered from the link 1 received data  
ꢀ Recovered from the sublink received data (for FCD-IPM with a Sublink).  
Loopback: User-configurable local or remote loopbacks  
•
5-34  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
•
When CRC-4 is enabled, diagnostics are available for the last 24 hours  
collected in 15-minute intervals (similar to the AT&T PUB 54016).  
T1 Setup Menu  
T1 SETUP: LINK 1 (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
----------------  
1. Clock master : [Link 1]  
2. Multiplier : [64 kbps]  
3. Time slots mapping  
4. General Diagnostics  
5. T1 parameters  
6. Additional Cards parameters  
7. Alarms filter  
8. Advanced Setup  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Figure 5-41. T1 Setup Menu  
Table 5-17. T1 Setup Parameters  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
Clock Master  
Selects the source clock that synchronizes the whole T1  
network  
Internal  
Link 1  
FCD-IPM generates the system source clock from an internal  
clock oscillator.  
FCD-IPM recovers the clock from the data received from the  
T1 link1  
For FCD-IPM with a sublink:  
I/O1 SUB T1  
I/O2 SUB T1  
FIX SUB T1  
FCD-IPM recovers the clock from the data received from one  
of the T1 sublinks  
Multiplier  
56 kbps, 64 kbps  
Sets the data rate of each DATA time slot.  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Table 5-17. T1 Setup Parameters (Cont.)  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
Time Slots  
Mapping  
Configures the routing and the type of individual timeslots for  
the link. Figure 5-42 shows the type of timeslots entering the  
multiplexer (MUX) (for FCD-IPM with a T1 sublink)  
For data from router/bridge  
For voice from sublink  
Data link1  
FIX SUB Voice  
For data from sublink  
FIX SUB Data  
For analog voice port 1, 2, 3, 4  
For analog voice port 1, 2, 3, 4  
For analog voice port 1, 2, 3, 4  
For data from I/O1 sublink  
For data from I/O2 sublink  
For voice from I/O1 sublink  
For voice from I/O2 sublink  
For I/O1 n x 64/56 data port  
For I/O2 n x 64/56 data port  
FIX Voice (1, 2, 3, 4)  
I/O1 Voice (1, 2, 3, 4)  
I/O2 Voice (1, 2, 3, 4)  
I/O1 SUB Data  
I/O2 SUB Data  
I/O1 SUB Voice  
I/O2 SUB Voice  
I/O1 Channel  
I/O2 Channel  
Note: For a multiplier of 64 kbps all timeslots can be  
configured to DATA. But, for a multiplier of 56 kbps, a  
maximum of 16 timeslots can be configured to DATA.  
For FCD-IPM with a T1 Sublink, this limitation does not exist  
for timeslots configured to the VOICE or DATA SUB type.  
5-36  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
T1 TIME SLOTS MAPPING: LINK 1 ( Device name - FCD-IPM )  
-----------------------------  
TS1 [DATA LINK1  
TS2 [DATA LINK1  
TS3 [NC  
]
]
]
]
TS13 [NC  
]
TS14 [I/O1 VOICE 1 ]  
TS15 [I/O1 VOICE 2 ]  
TS4 [NC  
TS16 [NC  
TS17 [NC  
TS18 [NC  
]
]
]
TS5 [FIX SUB-VOICE ]  
TS6 [FIX SUB-VOICE ]  
TS7 [FIX SUB-DATA ]  
TS19 [I/O2 VOICE 1 ]  
TS20 [I/O2 VOICE 4 ]  
TS8 [NC  
TS9 [NC  
TS10 [NC  
TS11 [NC  
TS12 [NC  
]
]
]
]
]
TS21 [NC  
TS22 [NC  
TS23 [NC  
TS24 [NC  
]
]
]
]
Enter time slot number (0 refers to all the time slots)  
Press 'ENTER' - to toggle the time slot type  
Press 'ESC' - to Return to previous menu  
Time slot number :  
Figure 5-42. T1 Time Slots Mapping Screen  
FCD-IPM (with Sub Link)  
DATA LINK1  
SUB-DATA  
SUB-VOICE  
Router/Bridge  
Link1  
DATA LINK1  
T1  
Service  
Sub Link  
SUB-DATA/SUB-VOICE  
T1 Service  
or PABX  
Figure 5-43. Time Slots Mapping (for FCD-IPM with a T1 Sublink)  
General Diagnostics  
Select this option to allow you to select the card on which the diagnostics is to be  
performed. A toggle option appears on the bottom of the screen. Use the  
spacebar to toggle between the card types. Press Enter to access the diagnostics  
screen.  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
For the cards:  
•
•
•
•
Main Link  
Fix sub  
I/O1 sub  
I/O2 sub  
The E1/T1 Loopback diagnostic test is selected.  
For the cards:  
•
•
•
Fix Voice  
I/O 1 Voice  
I/O 2 Voice  
Voice Diagnostics is selected.  
Loopback  
Loopback options are:  
•
•
Disabled  
Main Link Remote Analog Loopback – In this mode, FCD-IPM performs an  
analog loopback and transmits back the data that was received from the T1  
line. The loopback is shown in Figure 5-44.  
FCD-IPM  
Link1 T1 Interface  
T1  
Service  
Loopback  
Analog  
Front End  
Figure 5-44. Remote Analog Loopback  
•
Sublink Remote Analog Loopback (for FCD-IPM with a sublink) – In this  
mode,  
FCD-IPM performs an analog loopback and transmits back the data that was  
received from the sub T1 line. The loopback is shown in Figure 5-45.  
5-38  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
FCD-IPM (T1 with Sub Link)  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Router/Bridge  
Link1  
T1  
Service  
Sub Link T1  
Interface  
T1 Service  
or PABX  
Loopback  
Analog  
Front End  
Figure 5-45. Remote Analog Loopback for T1 and Sub T1 Links  
•
Main Link Remote Digital Loopback – In this mode FCD-IPM performs a  
digital loopback and transmits back the signal that was received from the T1  
line. The loopback is shown in Figure 5-46.  
FCD-IPM  
Link1 T1 Interface  
T1  
Service  
Loopback  
Digital  
Front End  
Figure 5-46. Remote Digital Loopback  
•
Sublink Remote Digital Loopback (for FCD-IPM with a sublink) – In this  
mode  
FCD-IPM performs a digital loopback and transmits back the signal that was  
received from the sub T1 line. The loopback is shown in Figure 5-47.  
FCD-IPM (T1 with Sub Link)  
Router/Bridge  
Link1  
T1  
Service  
Sub Link T1  
Interface  
T1 Service  
or PABX  
Digital  
Front End  
Loopback  
Figure 5-47. Remote Digital Loopback for T1 and Sub T1 Links  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
•
Main Link Local Analog Loopback – In this mode the data transmitted from  
FCD-IPM to the T1 line is sent back to the receive path instead of the received  
data from the T1 line. The loopback is shown in Figure 5-48.  
FCD-IPM  
Link1 T1 Interface  
T1  
Service  
Loopback  
Figure 5-48. Local Analog Loopback  
•
Sublink Local Analog Loopback (for FCD-IPM with a sublink) – In this mode  
the data transmitted from FCD-IPM to the sub T1 line is sent back to the  
receive path instead of the received data from the sub T1 line. The loopback is  
shown in Figure 5-49.  
FCD-IPM (T1 with Sub Link)  
Router/Bridge  
Link1  
T1  
Service  
Sub Link T1  
Interface  
T1 Service  
or PABX  
Loopback  
Figure 5-49. Local Analog Loopback for T1 and Sub T1 Links  
Voice Diagnostic Tools  
There are three voice diagnostic tools that are available for FCD-IPM. They can be  
set independently for each voice port:  
•
Tone injection to the voice port – a 1 kHz signal is injected into the receive  
voice port path, replacing any receive signal from T1  
•
Tone injection to the T1 – a 1 kHz signal is injected into the receive voice  
port path, replacing any receive signal from T1, and injected into the T1  
transmit path, replacing any transmit signal to T1  
•
Remote port loopback – the voice port signal which is received from T1 is  
transmitted back to T1.  
5-40  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
T1 Link Parameters  
T1 PARAMETERS: LINK 1 (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
---------------------  
1. Frame type  
2. Line code  
: [ESF]  
: [B8ZS]  
3. Tx line mask : [0-133 ft / 0 dB]  
4. Sync : [FAST]  
5. Idle code (hex): 7C  
6. Rx gain  
: [36 dB]  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Figure 5-50. T1 Parameters Link1 Menu  
The list of options may vary according to the system configuration. Additional  
options to those shown in the figure above may be included and are listed below.  
Note  
Table 5-18. T1 Parameters Link1 Parameters  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
Frame Type  
Sets the T1 framing type  
24 frames per multiframe  
12 frames per multiframe  
ESF  
SF  
Line Code  
B7ZS  
Sets the line coding method used for zero suppression. The zero  
suppression method is used to avoid long strings of '0', because  
these strings do not carry timing information.  
B8ZS  
Transparent  
0–133 ft / 0 dB  
133–266 ft  
266–399 ft  
399–533 ft  
533–655 ft  
7.5 dB  
Tx Line Mask  
Controls the link transmit signal characteristics.  
Options depend on whether the link should be configured with  
CSU.  
When the link is configured without CSU, the transit signal mask  
is selected according to the transit line length (0-655 ft.), to meet  
DSX-1 requirements.  
When the link is configured with CSU, the transit signal is  
attenuated by 7.5, 15, or 22.5 dB.  
15 dB  
22.5 dB  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Table 5-18. T1 Parameters Link1 Parameters (Cont.)  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
Sync  
Defines the time required for the link to return to normal  
operation after a red alarm event has terminated.  
FAST  
1 second  
AT&T 62411  
00 to FF  
10 seconds  
Idle Code  
Rx Gain  
Sets the value to be transmitted on the NC time slots  
30 dB, 36 dB  
Sets the maximum receive sensitivity for the T1 interface  
Remote Alarm  
Indication (for  
FCD-IPM with a  
Sublink)  
When configuring this parameter from the T1 Parameters menu,  
select this parameter to determine whether to transmit a yellow  
alarm indication on the T1 sublink when Link 1 is in yellow  
alarm state.  
When configuring this parameter from the Sublink T1  
Parameters menu, select this parameter to determine whether to  
transmit a yellow alarm indication on Link 1 when sublink T1 is  
in either yellow or red alarm state.  
Note: When Link 1 is in red alarm state, an “all ones” indication  
is sent to all of the T1 sublinks.  
Out-Of-Service  
Signaling (for  
FCD-IPM with a  
sublink)  
Determines the value of the A, B signaling bits sent to Link 1  
when the sublink is in the Out-Of-Service state. The C and D  
signaling bits are not affected.  
MARK  
Both A and B signaling bits are forced to '1' during out-of-service  
period  
SPACE  
Both A and B signaling bits are forced to '0' during out-of-service  
period  
MARK-SPACE  
SPACE-MARK  
Enable or Disable  
The A and B signaling bits are forced to '1' for 2.5 seconds, then  
shift to the '0' state until the out-of-service period ends  
The A and B signaling bits are forced to '0' for 2.5 seconds, then  
shift to the '1' state until the out-of-service period ends.  
Sublink Status  
(for FCD-IPM  
with a sublink)  
Additional Cards Parameters  
Select this option to allow you to select the card for which parameters are to be  
displayed. A toggle option appears on the bottom of the screen. Use the Space  
bar to toggle between the card types. Press Enter to access the parameters screen.  
5-42  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Card options are:  
•
Sub – depending on your hardware installation options are:  
ꢀ Fix Sub – parameters for T1 are shown as those in T1 Link Parameters.  
ꢀ I/O1 Sub  
ꢀ I/O2 Sub  
Voice  
•
ꢀ Fix Voice  
ꢀ I/O1Voice  
ꢀ I/O2 Voice.  
Voice Parameters  
FCD-IPM has optional voice capabilities.  
FXS Voice Interface  
VOICE PARAMETERS: (Device name - FCD-IPM , I/O1 VOICE)  
-----------------  
1. TX/RX gains  
2. Coding law  
: [µ LAW]  
3. On/off hook from the T1 on : [A bit]  
4. On/off hook to the T1 on : [A bit]  
5. Default ABCD to the T1  
6. Polarity  
: [0001]  
: [Disabled]  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-51. FXS Voice Interface  
RX/TX Gains  
Select this parameter to specify the nominal input level of the receive and transmit  
paths for each voice port. The input level range is –10 to +5 dBm.  
Coding Law  
Select this parameter to specify the compounding law to be used by the voice  
channels. The values are:  
µ Law Coding for T1 links.  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
On/off hook from the T1 On  
Select this parameter to specify the receive mode for on/off hook signaling from T1  
into FXS. The values are:  
A bit  
When the received A bit signal from T1 equals 1 then off hook will be  
indicated in the FXS interface  
When the received A bit signal from T1 equals 0 then on hook will be  
indicated in the FXS interface  
A bit inverted When the received A bit signal from T1 equals 1 then on hook will be  
indicated in the FXS interface  
When the received A bit signal from T1 equals 0 then off hook will be  
indicated in the FXS interface  
B bit  
When the received B bit signal from T1 equals 1 then off hook will be  
indicated in the FXS interface  
When the received B bit signal from T1 equals 0 then on hook will be  
indicated in the FXS interface  
B bit inverted When the received B bit signal from T1 equals 1 then on hook will be  
indicated in the FXS interface  
When the received B bit signal from T1 equals 0 then off hook will be  
indicated in the FXS interface  
On/off hook to the T1 On  
Select this parameter to specify the transmission mode for on/off hook signaling  
from FXS to T1. The values are:  
A bit  
For off hook indicated in the FXS interface, the transmitted A bit signal will  
be set to 1 towards T1  
For on hook indicated in the FXS interface, the transmitted A bit signal will  
be set to 0 towards T1  
A bit inverted For off hook indicated in the FXS interface, the transmitted A bit signal will  
be set to 0 towards T1  
For on hook indicated in the FXS interface, the transmitted A bit signal will  
be set to 1 towards T1  
B bit  
For off hook indicated in the FXS interface, the transmitted B bit signal will  
be set to 1 towards T1  
For on hook indicated in the FXS interface, the transmitted B bit signal will  
be set to 0 towards T1  
B bit inverted For off hook indicated in the FXS interface, the transmitted B bit signal will  
be set to 0 towards T1  
For on hook indicated in the FXS interface, the transmitted B bit signal will  
be set to 1 towards T1.  
5-44  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Default ABCD to the T1  
Select this parameter to specify signaling bits that are not in use for the on/off hook  
or for the polarity (if enabled). Those bits will be transmitted towards T1.  
Polarity (polarity reversal, also known as Wink Start Reversal)  
When polarity is configured as Enabled, the polarity signal is received from T1  
either on the B bit (while the on/off hook from T1/E1 parameter is configured to  
A bit or A bit inverted), or on the A bit (while the on/off hook from T1/E1 parameter  
is configured to B bit or B bit inverted).  
FXO Voice Interface  
VOICE PARAMETERS: ( Device name - FCD-IPM , I/O1 Voice)  
-----------------  
1. TX/RX gains  
2. Coding law  
: [µ LAW]  
3. On/off hook from the T1 on : [A bit]  
4. Ring Detection to the T1 on: [A bit]  
5. Default ABCD to the T1  
6. Polarity  
: [0000]  
: [Disabled]  
: [Disabled]  
: [Forced Idle]  
7. Signaling Feedback  
8. Out of Service method  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-52. FXO Voice Interface  
RX/TX Gains  
Select this parameter to specify the nominal input level of the receive and transmit  
paths for each voice port. The input level range is –10 to +5 dBmm.  
Coding Law  
Select this parameter to specify the companding law to be used by the voice  
channels. The values are:  
µ Law Coding for T1 links.  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
On/off hook from the T1 On  
Select this parameter to specify the receive mode for on/off hook signaling from T1  
into FXO. The values are:  
A bit  
When the received A bit signal from T1 equals 1 then off hook will be  
indicated in the FXO interface  
When the received A bit signal from T1 equals 0 then on hook will be  
indicated in the FXO interface  
A bit inverted When the received A bit signal from T1 equals 1 then on hook will be  
indicated in the FXO interface  
When the received A bit signal from T1 equals 0 then off hook will be  
indicated in the FXO interface  
B bit  
When the received B bit signal from T1 equals 1 then off hook will be  
indicated in the FXO interface  
When the received B bit signal from T1 equals 0 then on hook will be  
indicated in the FXO interface  
B bit inverted When the received B bit signal from T1 equals 1 then on hook will be  
indicated in the FXO interface  
When the received B bit signal from T1 equals 0 then off hook will be  
indicated in the FXO interface.  
Ring Detection to T1 On  
Select this parameter to specify the ring detection signaling transmission mode  
from FXO towards T1. The values are:  
A bit  
For ring detection the A bit signaling will be set to 1 towards T1  
For no ring detection the A bit signaling will be set to 0 towards T1  
A bit inverted For ring detection the A bit signaling will be set to 0 towards T1  
For no ring detection the A bit signaling will be set to 1 towards T1  
B bit  
For ring detection the B bit signaling will be set to 1 towards T1  
For no ring detection the B bit signaling will be set to 0 towards T1  
B bit inverted For ring detection the B bit signaling will be set to 0 towards T1  
For no ring detection the B bit signaling will be set to 1 towards T1.  
Default ABCD to the T1  
This parameter specifies the default signaling bits that are not used for ring  
detection or for polarity (if Enabled). Those bits will be transmitted towards T1.  
Polarity (polarity reversal, also known as Wink Start Reversal)  
When polarity is configured as Enabled, the polarity signal is received from T1  
either on the B bit (while the on/off hook from T1/E1 parameter is configured to  
A bit or A bit inverted), or on the A bit (while the on/off hook from T1/E1 parameter  
is configured to B bit or B bit inverted).  
5-46  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Signaling Feedback  
This parameter is set to:  
Enabled  
feedback of the on/off hook signaling that was received from T1 is  
transmitted back to T1  
Disabled  
feedback of the on/off hook signaling that was received from T1 is not  
transmitted back to T1.  
Out of Service Method  
This parameter specifies the on/off hook signaling in FXO when an Out of Service  
condition is indicated in the T1 link. The values are:  
Forced Idle  
Forced Busy  
signaling is held on hook for the duration of the Out of Service condition  
signaling is held off hook for the duration of the Out of Service condition.  
E & M Voice Interface  
VOICE PARAMETERS: (Device name - FCD-IPM I/O1 Voice)  
-----------------  
1. TX/RX gains  
2. Interface type  
3. E&M type  
: [4W]  
: [A bit]  
4. Coding law  
: [µ LAW]  
5. E signal from the T1 on: [A bit]  
6. M signal to the T1 on : [A bit]  
7. Default ABCD to the T1 : [0000]  
8. Out of Service method : [Forced Idle]  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-53. E & M Voice Interface  
RX/TX Gains  
Select this parameter to specify the nominal input level of the receive and transmit  
paths for each voice port. The input level range is –10 to +5 dBm.  
Interface Type  
This parameter specifies the interface type:  
2W  
4W  
two-wire interface  
four-wire interface.  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
E&M Type  
This parameter specifies the E&M signaling mode:  
•
•
•
•
Type1  
Type2  
Type3  
Type5 – SSDC5.  
Coding law  
Select this parameter to specify the compounding law to be used by the voice  
channels. The values are:  
•
µ Law Coding – for T1 links.  
E signal from the T1 On  
Select this parameter to specify the E signal receive mode from T1 into E&M. The  
values are:  
A bit  
When the received A bit signal from T1 equals 1 then the E signal will be  
activated in the E&M interface  
When the received A bit signal from T1 equals 0 then the E signal will be  
inactivated in the E&M interface  
A bit inverted When the received A bit signal from T1 equals 0 then the E signal will be  
activated in the E&M interface  
When the received A bit signal from T1 equals 1 then the E signal will be  
inactivated in the E&M interface  
B bit  
When the received B bit signal from T1 equals 1 then the E signal will be  
activated in the E&M interface  
When the received B bit signal from T1 equals 0 then the E signal will be  
inactivated in the E&M interface  
B bit inverted When the received B bit signal from T1 equals 0 then the E signal will be  
activated in the E&M interface  
When the received B bit signal from T1 equals 1 then the E signal will be  
inactivated in the E&M interface.  
Default ABCD to the T1  
This parameter specifies the default signaling bits that are not used for the  
M signal. Those bits will be transmitted towards T1.  
Out of Service Method  
This parameter specifies the E signaling state in E&M when an Out of Service  
condition is indicated in the T1 link. The values are:  
Forced Idle  
Forced Busy  
Idle Busy  
T1 signal is held at inactive for the duration of the Out of Service condition  
T1 signal is held at active for the duration of the Out of Service condition  
T1 signal is held at inactive for 2.5 seconds, and then toggled to active  
until the Out of Service condition end  
5-48  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Busy Idle  
T1 signal is held at active for 2.5 seconds, and then toggled to inactive  
until the Out of Service condition end.  
Time Slots for Voice Ports  
Refer to Timeslots Mapping in Table 5-17.  
A typical screen is shown in Figure 5-54.  
T1 TIME SLOTS MAPPING: LINK 1 ( Device name - FCD-IPM )  
-----------------------------  
TS1 [DATA LINK1  
TS2 [DATA LINK1  
TS3 [NC  
]
]
]
]
TS13 [NC  
]
TS14 [I/O1 VOICE 1 ]  
TS15 [I/O1 VOICE 2 ]  
TS4 [NC  
TS16 [NC  
TS17 [NC  
TS18 [NC  
]
]
]
TS5 [FIX SUB-VOICE ]  
TS6 [FIX SUB-VOICE ]  
TS7 [FIX SUB-DATA ]  
TS19 [I/O2 VOICE 1 ]  
TS20 [I/O2 VOICE 4 ]  
TS8 [NC  
TS9 [NC  
TS10 [NC  
TS11 [NC  
TS12 [NC  
]
]
]
]
]
TS21 [NC  
TS22 [NC  
TS23 [NC  
TS24 [NC  
]
]
]
]
Enter time slot number (0 refers to all the time slots)  
Press 'ENTER' - to toggle the time slot type  
Press 'ESC' - to Return to previous menu  
Time slot number :  
Figure 5-54. T1 Time Slots Mapping Link1 Screen  
Alarm Filter  
The Alarm Log File can show all events and alarm statuses that have occurred in  
the E1/T1 interface. You can use the Alarm Filter to mask or unmask events from  
the Alarm Log File.  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
T1 ALARMS FILTER (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
----------------  
1. Frame slip  
2. BPV error  
3. Execive BPV  
: [Unmasked]  
: [Unmasked]  
: [Unmasked]  
4. Execive error ratio: [Unmasked]  
5. Signal loss  
6. Yellow alarm  
7. Red alarm  
8. AIS red alarm  
9. AIS  
: [Unmasked]  
: [Unmasked]  
: [Unmasked]  
: [Unmasked]  
: [Unmasked]  
10. Network loop - LLB : [Unmasked]  
11. Network loop - PLB : [Unmasked]  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-55. T1 Alarms Filter Menu  
Advanced Setup Menu  
Select this option to configure the management via a dedicated time slot.  
This feature enables management of the FCD-IPM by configuring a specific time  
slot, of type MNGMNT. A new T1 management link is then created and assigned  
with a unique host IP address, which is different from the LAN/WAN IP addresses  
defined in other screens. The management host IP address is used for SNMP,  
Telnet, TFTP software download or ping.  
The management link must be of the IP router type, and is available to IP traffic  
only.  
Dedicated Time Slot Management Status  
Select this parameter to enable management via the dedicated time slot. By  
default, this is disabled.  
Management Time Slot Number  
Select this parameter to set the specific time slot number for management.  
Management Host IP Address  
Select this parameter to set a unique IP address.  
5-50  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
E1 Setup Menu  
This section describes the parameters in the E1 Setup menu.  
E1 Setup: LINK 1 (Device name – FCD-IPM)  
------------------  
1. Clock Master: [Link 1]  
2. Multiplier : [64 kbps]  
3. Time slots mapping  
4. General Diagnostics  
5. E1 parameters  
6. Additional Cards parameters  
7. Alarms filter  
8. Advanced Setup  
ESC – Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-56. E1 Setup Menu  
Table 5-19. E1 Setup Parameters  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
Clock Master  
Selects the source clock that synchronizes the whole E1  
network  
Internal  
Link 1  
FCD-IPM generates the system source clock from an internal  
clock oscillator.  
FCD-IPM recovers the clock from the data received from the  
E1 link1  
For FCD-IPM with a sublink  
I/O1 SUB E1  
I/O2 SUB E1  
FIX SUB E1  
FCD-IPM recovers the clock from the data received from one  
of the E1 sublinks  
Multiplier  
56 kbps, 64 kbps  
Sets the data rate of each DATA time slot.  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Table 5-19. E1 Setup Parameters (Cont.)  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
Time Slots  
Mapping  
Configures the routing and the type of individual timeslots for  
the link. Figure 5-57 shows the type of timeslots entering the  
multiplexer (MUX) (for FCD-IPM with an E1 sublink)  
For data from router/bridge  
For voice from sublink  
Data link1  
FIX SUB Voice  
For data from sublink  
FIX SUB Data  
For analog voice port 1, 2, 3, 4  
For analog voice port 1, 2, 3, 4  
For analog voice port 1, 2, 3, 4  
For data from I/O1 sublink  
For data from I/O2 sublink  
For voice from I/O1 sublink  
For voice from I/O2 sublink  
For I/O1 n x 64/56 data port  
For I/O2 n x 64/56 data port  
FIX Voice (1, 2, 3, 4)  
I/O1 Voice (1, 2, 3, 4)  
I/O2 Voice (1, 2, 3, 4)  
I/O1 SUB Data  
I/O2 SUB Data  
I/O1 SUB Voice  
I/O2 SUB Voice  
I/O1 Channel  
I/O2 Channel  
Note: For a multiplier of 64 kbps all timeslots can be  
configured to DATA. But, for a multiplier of 56 kbps, a  
maximum of 16 timeslots can be configured to DATA.  
For FCD-IPM with an E1 Sublink, this limitation does not exist  
for timeslots configured to the VOICE or DATA SUB type.  
5-52  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
E1 TIME SLOTS MAPPING: LINK1 (Device name – FCD-IPM)  
---------------------  
TS1 [DATA LINK1  
]
TS17 [NC  
TS18 [NC  
TS19 [NC  
TS20 [NC  
TS21 [NC  
TS22 [NC  
TS23 [NC  
TS24 [NC  
TS25 [NC  
TS26 [NC  
TS27 [NC  
TS28 [NC  
TS29 [NC  
TS30 [NC  
TS31 [NC  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
TS2 [FIX SUB-VOICE]  
TS3 [FIX SUB-DATA ]  
TS4 [I/O1 VOICE 1 ]  
TS5 [I/O1 VOICE 2 ]  
TS6 [NC  
TS7 [NC  
TS8 [NC  
TS9 [NC  
]
]
]
]
TS10 [I/O2 CHANNEL ]  
TS11 [NC  
TS12 [NC  
TS13 [NC  
TS14 [NC  
TS15 [NC  
TS16 [NC  
]
]
]
]
]
]
Enter time slot number (0 refer to all time slots)  
Press ‘ENTER’ – to toggle the time slot type  
Press ‘ESC’ - to Return to previous menu  
Time slot number: 5  
Figure 5-57. E1 Time Slots Mapping Screen  
FCD-IPM (with Sub Link)  
Router/Bridge  
Link1  
DATA/DATA_SUB/VOICE  
DATA  
E1  
Service  
Sub Link  
DATA_SUB/VOICE  
E1 Service  
or PABX  
Figure 5-58. Time Slots Mapping (for FCD-IPM with an E1 Sublink)  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
General Diagnostics  
Select this option to allow you to select the card on which the diagnostics is to be  
performed. A toggle option appears on the bottom of the screen. Use the Space  
bar to toggle between the card types. Press Enter to access the diagnostics screen.  
For the cards:  
•
•
•
•
Main Link  
Fix sub  
I/O1 sub  
I/O2 sub  
The E1/T1 Loopback diagnostic test is selected.  
For the cards:  
•
•
•
Fix Voice  
I/O 1 Voice  
I/O 2 Voice  
Voice Diagnostics is selected.  
Loopback  
Loopback options are:  
•
•
Disabled  
Main Link Remote Analog Loopback – In this mode, FCD-IPM performs an  
analog loopback and transmits back the data that was received from the E1  
line. The loopback is shown in Figure 5-59.  
FCD-IPM  
E1 Interface  
E1  
Service  
Loopback  
Figure 5-59. Remote Analog Loopback  
•
Sublink Remote Analog Loopback (for FCD-IPM with a Sublink) – In this  
mode, FCD-IPM performs an analog loopback and transmits back the data that  
was received from the sub E1 line. The loopback is shown in Figure 5-60.  
5-54  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
FCD-IPM (E1 with Sub Link)  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Router/Bridge  
Link1  
E1  
Service  
Sub Link E1  
Interface  
E1 Service  
or PABX  
Analog  
Front End  
Loopback  
Figure 5-60. Remote Analog Loopback for E1 and Sub E1 Links  
•
Main Link Local Analog Loopback – In this mode, the data transmitted from  
FCD-IPM to the E1 line is sent back to the receive path, instead of the data  
received from the E1 line. The loopback is shown in Figure 5-61.  
FCD-IPM  
E1 Interface  
E1  
Service  
Loopback  
Figure 5-61. Local Analog Loopback  
•
Sublink Local Analog Loopback (for FCD-IPM with a Sublink) – In this mode  
the data transmitted from FCD-IPM to the sub E1 line is sent back to the  
receive path instead of the received data from the sub E1 line. The loopback is  
shown in Figure 5-62.  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
FCD-IPM (E1 with Sub Link)  
Router/Bridge  
Link1  
E1  
Service  
Sub Link E1  
Interface  
E1 Service  
or PABX  
Loopback  
Figure 5-62. Local Analog Loopback for E1 and Sub E1 Links  
Note  
The local analog loopback is not available for FCD-IPM units equipped with E1 over  
SHDSL interface.  
Voice Diagnostic Tools  
There are three voice diagnostic tools that are available for FCD-IPM. They can be  
set independently for each voice port:  
•
Tone injection to the voice port – a 1 kHz signal is injected into the receive  
voice port path, replacing any receive signal from E1  
•
Tone injection to the E1 – a 1 kHz signal is injected into the receive voice  
port path, replacing any receive signal from E1, and injected into the E1  
transmit path, replacing any transmit signal to E1  
•
Remote port loopback – the voice port signal which is received from E1 is  
transmitted back to E1.  
E1 Link Parameters  
Select this option to configure the parameters that follow.  
E1 PARAMETERS: LINK 1 (Device name – FCD-IPM)  
------------------------------  
1. Frame type  
2. CRC-4  
3. Sync  
: [G732S]  
: [ON]  
: [FAST]  
4. Idle code (hex) : 7C  
5. Rx gain  
: [30 dB]  
ESC – Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-63. E1 Parameters  
5-56  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Table 5-20. E1 Link1 Parameters  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
G732N  
Description  
Frame Type  
2 frames per multiframe. Time slot 16 can be used for user data.  
G732S  
16 frames per multiframe. Time slot 16 is used for the Channel  
Associated Signaling (CAS).  
CRC-4  
Sync  
On, Off  
Cyclic Redundancy Check – enables or disables calculation of  
4-bits check sum in order to detect errors in frames  
Defines the time required for the link to return to normal  
operation after a red alarm event has terminated.  
FAST  
1 second  
AT&T 62411  
CCITT  
10 seconds  
100 msec.  
Idle Code  
Rx Gain  
00 to FF  
Sets the value to be transmitted on the NC time slots  
12 dB, 30 dB  
Sets the maximum receive sensitivity for the E1 interface  
Remote Alarm  
Indication (for  
FCD-IPM with a  
Sublink)  
When configuring this parameter from the E1 Parameters menu,  
select this parameter to determine whether to transmit a yellow  
alarm indication on the E1 sublink when Link 1 is in yellow  
alarm state.  
When configuring this parameter from the Sublink E1  
Parameters menu, select this parameter to determine whether to  
transmit a yellow alarm indication on Link 1 when sublink E1 is  
in either yellow or red alarm state.  
Note: When Link 1 is in red alarm state, an “all ones” indication  
is sent to all of the E1 sublinks.  
Out-Of-Service  
Signaling (for  
FCD-IPM with a  
Sublink)  
Determines the value of the A, B signaling bits sent to Link 1  
when the sublink is in the Out-Of-Service state. The C and D  
signaling bits are not affected.  
Mark  
Both A and B signaling bits are forced to '1' during out-of-service  
period  
Space  
Both A and B signaling bits are forced to '0' during out-of-service  
period  
Mark-space  
Space-mark  
Enable or Disable  
The A and B signaling bits are forced to '1' for 2.5 seconds, then  
shift to the '0' state until the out-of-service period ends  
The A and B signaling bits are forced to '0' for 2.5 seconds, then  
shift to the '1' state until the out-of-service period ends.  
Sublink Status  
(for FCD-IPM  
with a Sublink)  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Additional Cards Parameters  
Select this option to allow you to select the card for which parameters are to be  
displayed. A toggle option appears on the bottom of the screen. Use the Space  
bar to toggle between the card types. Press Enter to access the parameters screen.  
Card options are:  
•
Sub – depending on your hardware installation options are:  
ꢀ Fix Sub – parameters for E1 are shown as those in Table 5-19  
ꢀ I/O1 Sub  
ꢀ I/O2 Sub  
Voice  
•
ꢀ Fix Voice  
ꢀ I/O1Voice  
ꢀ I/O2 Voice.  
Voice Parameters  
FCD-IPM has optional voice capabilities.  
FXS Voice Interface  
VOICE PARAMETERS: (Device name - FCD-IPM , I/O1 VOICE)  
-----------------  
1. TX/RX gains  
2. Coding law  
: [A LAW]  
3. On/off hook from the E1 on : [A bit]  
4. On/off hook to the E1 on : [A bit]  
5. Default ABCD to the E1  
6. Polarity  
: [0001]  
: [Disabled]  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-64. FXS Voice Parameters  
TX/RX Gains  
Select this parameter to specify the nominal input level of the receive and transmit  
paths for each voice port. The input level range is –10 to +5 dBm.  
Coding Law  
Select this parameter to specify the compounding law to be used by the voice  
channels. The values are:  
A Law coding for E1 links  
5-58  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
On/off hook from the E1 on  
Select this parameter to specify the receive mode for on/off hook signaling from E1  
into FXS. The values are:  
A bit  
When the received A bit signal from E1 equals 1 then off hook will be  
indicated in the FXS interface  
When the received A bit signal from E1 equals 0 then on hook will be  
indicated in the FXS interface  
A bit inverted When the received A bit signal from E1 equals 1 then on hook will be  
indicated in the FXS interface  
When the received A bit signal from E1 equals 0 then off hook will be  
indicated in the FXS interface  
B bit  
When the received B bit signal from E1 equals 1 then off hook will be  
indicated in the FXS interface  
When the received B bit signal from E1 equals 0 then on hook will be  
indicated in the FXS interface  
B bit inverted When the received B bit signal from E1 equals 1 then on hook will be  
indicated in the FXS interface  
When the received B bit signal from E1 equals 0 then off hook will be  
indicated in the FXS interface  
On/off hook to the E1 on  
Select this parameter to specify the transmission mode for on/off hook signaling  
from FXS to E1. The values are:  
A bit  
For off hook indicated in the FXS interface, the transmitted A bit signal will  
be set to 1 towards E1  
For on hook indicated in the FXS interface, the transmitted A bit signal will  
be set to 0 towards E1  
A bit inverted For off hook indicated in the FXS interface, the transmitted A bit signal will  
be set to 0 towards E1  
For on hook indicated in the FXS interface, the transmitted A bit signal will  
be set to 1 towards E1  
B bit  
For off hook indicated in the FXS interface, the transmitted B bit signal will  
be set to 1 towards E1  
For on hook indicated in the FXS interface, the transmitted B bit signal will  
be set to 0 towards E1  
B bit inverted For off hook indicated in the FXS interface, the transmitted B bit signal will  
be set to 0 towards E1  
For on hook indicated in the FXS interface, the transmitted B bit signal will  
be set to 1 towards E1.  
Default ABCD to the E1  
Select this parameter to specify signaling bits that are not in use for the on/off hook  
or for the polarity (if enabled). Those bits will be transmitted towards E1.  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Polarity (polarity reversal, also known as Wink Start Reversal)  
When polarity is configured as Enabled, the polarity signal is received from E1  
either on the B bit (while the on/off hook from T1/E1 parameter is configured to  
A bit or A bit inverted), or on the A bit (while the on/off hook from T1/E1 parameter  
is configured to B bit or B bit inverted).  
FXO Voice Interface  
VOICE PARAMETERS: ( Device name - FCD-IPM , FXO)  
-----------------  
1. TX/RX gains  
2. Coding law  
: [A LAW]  
3. On/off hook from the E1 on : [A bit]  
4. Ring Detection to the E1 on: [A bit]  
5. Default ABCD to the E1  
6. Polarity  
: [0000]  
: [Disabled]  
: [Disabled]  
: [Forced Idle]  
7. Signaling Feedback  
8. Out of Service method  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-65. FXO Voice Interface  
TX/RX Gains  
Select this parameter to specify the nominal input level of the receive and transmit  
paths for each voice port. The input level range is –10 to +5 dBmm.  
Coding Law  
Select this parameter to specify the compounding law to be used by the voice  
channels. The values are:  
A Law coding for E1 links  
On/off hook from the E1 on  
Select this parameter to specify the receive mode for on/off hook signaling from E1  
into FXO. The values are:  
A bit  
When the received A bit signal from E1 equals 1 then off hook will be  
indicated in the FXO interface  
When the received A bit signal from E1 equals 0 then on hook will be  
indicated in the FXO interface  
5-60  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
A bit inverted When the received A bit signal from E1 equals 1 then on hook will be  
indicated in the FXO interface  
When the received A bit signal from E1 equals 0 then off hook will be  
indicated in the FXO interface  
B bit  
When the received B bit signal from E1 equals 1 then off hook will be  
indicated in the FXO interface  
When the received B bit signal from E1 equals 0 then on hook will be  
indicated in the FXO interface  
B bit inverted When the received B bit signal from E1 equals 1 then on hook will be  
indicated in the FXO interface  
When the received B bit signal from E1 equals 0 then off hook will be  
indicated in the FXO interface.  
Ring Detection to E1 on  
Select this parameter to specify the ring detection signaling transmission mode  
from FXO towards E1. The values are:  
A bit  
For ring detection the A bit signaling will be set to 1 towards E1  
For no ring detection the A bit signaling will be set to 0 towards E1  
A bit inverted For ring detection the A bit signaling will be set to 0 towards E1  
For no ring detection the A bit signaling will be set to 1 towards E1  
B bit  
For ring detection the B bit signaling will be set to 1 towards E1  
For no ring detection the B bit signaling will be set to 0 towards E1  
B bit inverted For ring detection the B bit signaling will be set to 0 towards E1  
For no ring detection the B bit signaling will be set to 1 towards E1.  
Default ABCD to the E1  
This parameter specifies the default signaling bits that are not used for ring  
detection or for polarity (if Enabled). Those bits will be transmitted towards E1.  
Polarity (polarity reversal, also known as Wink Start Reversal)  
When polarity is configured as Enabled, the polarity signal is received from E1  
either on the B bit (while the on/off hook from T1/E1 parameter is configured to  
A bit or A bit inverted), or on the A bit (while the on/off hook from T1/E1 parameter  
is configured to B bit or B bit inverted).  
Signaling Feedback  
This parameter is set to:  
Enabled  
feedback of the on/off hook signaling that was received from E1 is  
transmitted back to E1  
Disabled  
feedback of the on/off hook signaling that was received from E1 is not  
transmitted back to E1.  
Out of Service Method  
This parameter specifies the on/off hook signaling in FXO when an Out of Service  
condition is indicated in the E1 link. The values are:  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Forced Idle  
Forced Busy  
signaling is held on hook for the duration of the Out of Service condition  
signaling is held off hook for the duration of the Out of Service condition.  
E & M Voice Interface  
VOICE PARAMETERS: (Device name - FCD-IPM E&M)  
-----------------  
1. TX/RX gains  
2. Interface type  
3. E&M type  
: [4W]  
: [A bit]  
: [A LAW]  
4. Coding law  
5. E signal from the E1 on: [A bit]  
6. M signal to the E1 on : [A bit]  
7. Default ABCD to the E1 : [0000]  
8. Out of Service method : [Forced Idle]  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-66. E & M Voice Interface  
RX/TX Gains  
Select this parameter to specify the nominal input level of the receive and transmit  
paths for each voice port. The input level range is –10 to +5 dBm.  
Interface Type  
This parameter specifies the interface type:  
2W  
4W  
2-wire interface  
4-wire interface.  
E&M Type  
This parameter specifies the E&M signaling mode:  
•
•
•
•
Type1  
Type2  
Type3  
Type5 – SSDC5.  
Coding law  
Select this parameter to specify the compounding law to be used by the voice  
channels. The values are:  
5-62  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
A Law Coding for E1 links  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
E signal from the E1 on  
Select this parameter to specify the E signal receive mode from E1 into E&M. The  
values are:  
A bit  
When the received A bit signal from E1 equals 1 then the E signal will be  
activated in the E&M interface  
When the received A bit signal from E1 equals 0 then the E signal will be  
inactivated in the E&M interface  
A bit inverted When the received A bit signal from E1 equals 0 then the E signal will be  
activated in the E&M interface  
When the received A bit signal from E1 equals 1 then the E signal will be  
inactivated in the E&M interface  
B bit  
When the received B bit signal from E1 equals 1 then the E signal will be  
activated in the E&M interface  
When the received B bit signal from E1 equals 0 then the E signal will be  
inactivated in the E&M interface  
B bit inverted When the received B bit signal from E1 equals 0 then the E signal will be  
activated in the E&M interface  
When the received B bit signal from E1 equals 1 then the E signal will be  
inactivated in the E&M interface.  
Default ABCD to the E1  
This parameter specifies the default signaling bits that are not used for the  
M signal. Those bits will be transmitted towards E1.  
Out of Service Method  
This parameter specifies the E signaling state in E&M when an Out of Service  
condition is indicated in the E1 link. The values are:  
Forced Idle  
Forced Busy  
Idle Busy  
E1 signal is held at inactive for the duration of the Out of Service condition  
E1 signal is held at active for the duration of the Out of Service condition  
E1 signal is held at inactive for 2.5 seconds, and then toggled to active  
until the Out of Service condition end  
Busy Idle  
E1 signal is held at active for 2.5 seconds, and then toggled to inactive  
until the Out of Service condition end.  
Time Slots for Voice Ports  
Refer to Table 5-19.  
A typical screen is shown in Figure 5-67.  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
E1 TIME SLOTS MAPPING: LINK1 (Device name – FCD-IPM)  
---------------------  
TS1 [DATA LINK1]  
TS2 [DATA LINK1]  
TS3 [NC]  
TS17 [NC]  
TS18 [NC]  
TS19 [NC]  
TS20 [NC]  
TS4 [NC]  
TS5 [FIX SUB-VOICE] TS21 [NC]  
TS6 [FIX SUB-VOICE] TS22 [NC]  
TS7 [FIX SUB-DATA] TS23 [NC]  
TS8 [NC]  
TS9 [NC]  
TS10 [NC]  
TS11 [NC]  
TS12 [NC]  
TS13 [NC]  
TS24 [NC]  
TS25 [NC]  
TS26 [NC]  
TS27 [NC]  
TS28 [NC]  
TS29 [I/O2 VOICE 1]  
TS14 [I/O1 VOICE 1] TS30 [I/O2 VOICE 4]  
TS15 [I/O1 VOICE 2] TS31 [NC]  
TS16 [NC]  
Enter time slot number (0 refer to all time slots)  
Press ‘ENTER’ – to toggle the time slot type  
Press ‘ESC’ - to Return to previous menu  
Time slot number: 5  
Figure 5-67. E1 Time Slots Mapping Link1 Screen  
Alarms Filter  
The Alarm Log File shows all events and alarm statuses that have occurred in the  
E1/T1 interface. You can use the Alarm Filter to mask or unmask events from the  
Alarm Log File.  
5-64  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
E1 ALARMS FILTER (Device name – FCD-IPM)  
-----------------------  
1. Frame slip  
2. BPV error  
3. Excessive BPV  
4. CRC-4 error  
5. Excessive error ratio  
6. Signal loss  
: [Unmasked]  
: [Unmasked]  
: [Unmasked]  
: [Unmasked]  
: [Unmasked]  
: [Unmasked]  
: [Unmasked]  
: [Unmasked]  
7. Remote sync loss  
8. Local sync loss  
9. Local multi frame alarm : [Unmasked]  
10. Remote multi frame alarm : [Unmasked]  
11. AIS red alarm  
12. AIS  
: [Masked]  
: [Unmasked]  
ESC – Return to previous menu  
Figure 5-68. E1 Alarms Filter Screen  
Advanced Setup  
Select this option to configure the management via a dedicated time slot.  
This feature enables management of FCD-IPM by configuring a specific time slot,  
of type MNGMNT. A new E1 management link is then created and assigned with a  
unique host IP address, which is different from the LAN/WAN IP addresses defined  
in other screens. The management host IP address is used for SNMP, Telnet, TFTP  
software download or ping.  
The management link must be of the IP router type, and is available to IP traffic  
only.  
Dedicated Time Slot Management Status  
Select this parameter to enable management via the dedicated time slot. By  
default, this is disabled.  
Management Time Slot Number  
Select this parameter to set the specific time slot number for management.  
Management Host IP Address  
Select this parameter to set a unique IP address.  
ISDN Settings Menu  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓3  
Interface Parameters Menu  
↓2  
ISDN Settings Menu  
FCD-IPM with ISDN connects your Ethernet LAN to the Internet/Intranet at a rate  
of 64 or 128 Kbps. FCD-IPM with an ISDN interface was designed to reduce WAN  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
costs to a minimum. WAN economy is achieved through automatic spoofing and  
connection-on-demand features for Internet/Intranet access.  
ISDN (BRI)  
64/128 kbps  
FCD-IPM  
Internet  
ISDN  
S/T or U-Interface  
Figure 5-69. Connection to the Internet over ISDN  
ISDN has the following features:  
•
•
•
•
•
ISDN BRI  
Standard S/T interface  
Optional U-interface eliminates the need for an external NT1 device  
Connection rate from 64 to 128 Kbps  
Protocols supported: ETSI (Europe), NTT (Japan), NI-1 (U.S), 5ESS (U.S),  
DMS-100 (U.S), V1 and Leased ISDN (I.430).  
ꢀ
To activate the ISDN line:  
1. Choose the ISDN protocol.  
2. Choose the Connection Rate (bandwidth): 56 or 64 kbps.  
The ISDN interface parameter has the following groups of sub parameters:  
•
•
•
Dialing mode parameters are shown in Table 5-21.  
Answering mode parameters are shown in Table 5-22.  
Local number for dialback parameters are shown in Table 5-23.  
Table 5-21. Dialing Mode Parameters  
Parameters  
Description  
Destination Phone  
Number  
Select the phone number of the station you want to dial. This parameter is  
mandatory for dialing out. The other dialing mode parameters are optional.  
Destination Sub-Number  
Source Phone Number  
Select the extension number of the destination phone number.  
Select the phone number of the person dialing out. This parameter is used by  
the destination station to identify the caller.  
Source Sub-Number  
Select the extension number of the person dialing out.  
Table 5-22. Answering Mode Parameters  
Description  
Parameters  
Local Phone Number  
Select this parameter to enter the number to which incoming calls are  
directed.  
Local Sub-Number  
Select this parameter to enter the extension to which incoming calls are  
directed.  
5-66  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Table 5-23. Local Number for Dialback  
Description  
Parameters  
Dialback Phone Number  
Select this parameter to enter the phone number which is used by the ISP to  
dial back FCD-IPM. When FCD-IPM wants to dial-up to the ISP, the ISP uses  
this number to identify and dial back FCD-IPM (similar to reverse charging). In  
this way, the PTT bills the ISP and not the caller. This feature is only useful  
when dialback is enabled on both sides.  
Dialback Sub-Number  
Select this parameter to enter the extension used by the ISP for dialback  
purposes.  
Dialback  
Phone Number  
Corporate  
Headquarters  
ISDN  
FCD-IPM  
Central Access  
Router  
Figure 5-70. Dialback Phone Number  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Frame Relay Settings  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓3  
Interface Parameters Menu  
↓3  
Frame Relay Settings Menu  
FRAME RELAY DLCI SETTINGS ( Device name - 27 )  
-------------------------  
LINK  
DLCI STATE  
CIR  
EXCESS  
THROUGHPUT  
---------- ---- -------- ---------- ---------- ----------  
A - Add, E - Edit, D - Delete, C - Clear all  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-71. Frame Relay DLCI Settings  
Frame Relay is a form of WAN that is designed to maximize throughput and  
minimize cost by simplifying network processing.  
Figure 5-72 shows the connection of FCD-IPM to Internet/Intranet through Frame  
Relay network.  
Internet  
Frame Relay  
FCD-IPM  
Figure 5-72. Connection to the Internet over Frame Relay  
Frame Relay:  
•
•
•
Supports permanent virtual circuits (PVC)  
Supports Frame Relay (IP/IPX/Bridge) encapsulation based on RFC 1490  
Supports different maintenance protocols:  
ꢀ T1.617/ANNEX D  
ꢀ Q.933/ANNEX A  
ꢀ LMI  
5-68  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
•
•
Supports self-learning of the maintenance protocol and the DLCI which  
enables connection to the Frame Relay network without configuring Frame  
Relay parameters  
Executes congestion control when an explicit congestion notification is  
received for the DLCI from the Frame Relay network. The unit reduces the  
transmitted information rate of the DLCI and increases it when the congestion  
condition is cleared.  
•
Supports the Frame Relay SNMP MIB.  
Implementing Frame Relay  
The diagram below maps the options in the Advanced Menu which are used to  
configure FCD-IPM for operation over a Frame Relay network.  
The parameters in the Frame Relay Links Parameters menu are described in  
Table 5-24.  
Main Menu  
Advanced  
Menu  
Device  
Central  
View  
Setup  
Frame  
Relay  
DLCIs'  
Interface  
Parameters  
Reset  
Options  
Frame  
Relay DLCI  
Setting  
View Frame Relay  
DLCI Parameters  
Reset Link  
Link Setting  
Excess  
State  
CIR  
Throughput  
DLCI  
Self Learn DLCI/  
Maintenance  
Maintenance  
Protocol  
Polling  
Interval  
Full Enquiry  
Interval  
Error  
Threshold  
Monitored  
Events  
CLLM Status  
Figure 5-73. Frame Relay Options in the Advanced Menu  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Table 5-24. Frame Relay Link Parameters  
Description  
Parameters  
Self Learn  
DLCI/Maintenance  
Specifies whether FCD-IPM will self learn the maintenance protocol on the  
Frame Relay link and the existing DLCIs with their status (UP or DOWN).  
When this parameter is disabled (OFF), you need to configure the  
maintenance protocol and the DLCIs manually.  
CLLM Status  
Specifies whether CLLM frames, used for congestion indication, will be  
supported (ON) or not (OFF).  
Maintenance Protocol  
Specifies the maintenance protocol of the Frame Relay link: T1.617/ANNEX  
D, Q.933/ANNEX A, LMI or None. This parameter can only be configured if  
Self learn DLCI /Maintenance parameter is disabled (OFF).  
Polling Interval  
Specifies the number of seconds between transmission of two successive status  
enquiry frames.  
Full Enquiry Interval  
Error Threshold  
Specifies the number of polling intervals after which a full status request frame  
is transmitted.  
Specifies the number of unacknowledged monitored events (status enquiry  
frames and full status enquiry frames) that can occur in a sliding monitored  
events window before the link is declared DOWN.  
Monitored Events  
Specifies the number of monitored events (status enquiry frames and full status  
enquiry frames) in a sliding monitored events window.  
5-70  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Polling interval = 10  
Full enquiry interval = 4  
FCD-IPM  
Frame Relay Network  
Full Status Enquiry  
Full Status Reply  
10 seconds  
10 seconds  
10 seconds  
10 seconds  
10 seconds  
Status Enquiry  
Status Enquiry  
Status Enquiry  
Status Enquiry  
Status Enquiry Reply  
Status Enquiry Reply  
Status Enquiry Reply  
Status Enquiry Reply  
Full Status Reply  
Full Status  
Enquiry  
Time  
Figure 5-74. Polling Intervals  
Error threshold = 3  
Monitored events = 5  
Sliding monitored events window  
S.E.  
Frame  
S.E.  
Frame  
S.E.  
Frame  
S.E.  
Frame  
S.E.  
Frame  
S.E.  
Frame  
F.S.E.  
Frame  
?
?
?
Acknowledged.  
Frame  
Monitored events  
(status enquiring frames  
and full status enquiry  
frame = 5)  
Unacknowledged.  
Frame  
Link is DOWN when unacknowledged monitored events > 3  
Link is UP when unacknowledged monitored events < 3  
Figure 5-75. Monitored Events  
After the link is declared DOWN, it can only be declared UP again when the  
sliding monitored events window contains only successfully monitored events.  
Link is DOWN  
3
?
3
?
?
?
?
?
3
3
3
3
3
Link is UP  
Link is UP again  
Figure 5-76. Monitored Events - Down Link  
Interface Parameters Menu  
5-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Frame Relay DLCI Parameters  
Table 5-25. Frame Relay DLCI Parameters  
Parameters  
DLCI  
Possible Values  
Description  
16 to 991  
Specifies the DLCI number  
Specifies the DLCI state  
State  
Enabled  
Disabled  
CIR  
The value of this parameter is Specifies the maximum amount of data (in bits) which  
obtained from the Frame  
Relay provider.  
the network guarantees to transfer during the  
measurement interval (the measurement interval is  
usually one second)  
Excess  
The value of this parameter  
should be received from the  
Frame Relay provider.  
Specifies the maximum amount of uncommitted data  
bits that the network will attempt to deliver during the  
measurement interval  
Throughput  
Specifies the average number of data bits per second  
transferred by the network. When a measurement  
interval of one second is assigned to the CIR, the  
throughput value should equal the CIR value.  
5-72  
Interface Parameters Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
5.4 Access Control (Security) Menu  
Select this option to perform security operations  
Advanced Menu  
Setup  
1
2
4
Access Control  
(Security)  
Device Control  
1
2
3
4
Device Security  
Identity  
Security Host/  
Guest  
Login Script  
Setup  
External Access  
Security  
1. Security  
Authentication  
1. Name  
2. Minimum Accepted  
PPP Security  
2. Password  
3. Accessible  
Stations/Nets  
4. User Access  
Profiles  
1. Access Mode  
1. Unlimited Access  
2. Limited Access  
2. Limit Access List  
3. Static Statiions/Net  
Access  
Figure 5-77. Access Control Menu Outline  
ꢀ
To access the Access Control menu:  
1. In the Advanced Menu, press 1.  
The Setup menu appears.  
2. In the Setup menu, press 4.  
The Access Control menu appears (refer to Figure 5-78).  
Access Control (Security) Menu  
5-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
ACCESS CONTROL ( Device name - FCD-IPM)  
--------------  
1. External access security  
2. Device security identity  
3. Security Host/Guest  
4. Script Setup  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-78. Access Control Menu  
The options in the Access Control menu are described below.  
External Access Security (only relevant to Link with PPP Protocol)  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓4  
Access Control (Security) Menu  
↓1  
External Access Security Menu  
EXTERNAL ACCESS SECURITY ( Device name - FCD-IPM )  
------------------------  
1. Security authentication: [None]  
2. Host accepted PPP authentication  
3. Accessible stations/nets  
4. User access profiles  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-79. External Access Security Menu  
5-74  
Access Control (Security) Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Table 5-26. External Access Security Parameters  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
Security  
Authentication  
Protects your LAN against unwanted entry by outside users.  
Access permitted to all users.  
None  
User Access Profile  
RADIUS  
Allow/deny access according to the User Access Profile (see below).  
Allow/deny access according to the RADIUS Authenticator.  
User Access  
Profile+RADIUS  
Access is allowed if the User Access Profile permits it OR if the User  
Access Profile does not have an entry for the user but the RADIUS  
Authenticator allows it.  
Note: If you select RADIUS, configure the RADIUS Access parameters  
from the Host Parameters Menu. Refer to RADIUS Authentication and  
Billing.  
Accepted PPP  
Authentication  
(only relevant to  
Link with PPP  
Protocol)  
PPP supports two types of security systems:  
CHAP (Challenge  
Handshake  
Authentication  
CHAP is a type of authentication in which the authentication agent  
(typically a network server) sends the client program a key to be used  
to encrypt the username and password. This enables the username and  
password to be transmitted in an encrypted form to protect them  
against hackers.  
Protocol)  
PAP (Password  
Authentication  
Protocol)  
PAP is the most basic form of authentication, in which a user's name  
and password are transmitted over a network and compared to a table  
of name-password pairs. Typically, the passwords stored in the table  
are encrypted. The main weakness of PAP is that both the username  
and password are transmitted in an unencrypted form.  
Accessible  
Stations/Nets  
Defines parameters which limit public access to the network. Access  
can be allowed for all stations/nets, only certain stations/nets, or only  
stations/nets which are static. When the access mode is 'limited', use  
the access list to define which stations/nets have access.  
User Access  
Profiles (only  
relevant to Link  
with PPP  
View and modify user access profiles in the access control users list.  
The list contains user names, security parameters and dialback options.  
Protocol)  
Access Control (Security) Menu  
5-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Device Security Identity (PPP only)  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓4  
Access Control (Security)  
↓2  
Device Security Identity Menu  
DEVICE SECURITY IDENTITY ( Device name – FCD-IPM )  
1. Name  
: FCD IPM  
2. Password:  
Press the number to edit value or ESC to return to the previous screen:  
Figure 5-80. Device Security Identity Menu  
Table 5-27. Device Security Identity  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
Name  
Assigns a name to FCD-IPM for access to the ISP central access  
router. The maximum length is 30 characters.  
Password  
Assigns a password to FCD-IPM for access to the ISP central  
access router. The maximum length is 30 characters.  
5-76  
Access Control (Security) Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Security Host/Guest (PPP only)  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓4  
Access Control (Security)  
↓3  
Security Host/Guest Menu  
SECURITY HOST/GUEST ( Device name - FCD-IPM )  
1. Security for LINK 1  
2. Security for LINK 2  
: [HOST ]  
: [HOST ]  
Press the number to edit value or ESC to return to the previous screen:  
Figure 5-81. Security Host/Guest Menu  
Select this parameter to define a link's security status. When a link is defined as a  
Host, users are approved according to your profile list. When the link is defined as  
a Guest, the device sends its name and password (defined above) to be approved  
by the host. The Guest mode is the default for Originate only links. For Answer  
and Answer&Originate links the default mode is Host.  
Login Script Setup  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓4  
Access Control (Security)  
↓4  
Script Setup Menu  
CURRENT SCRIPT FOR LINK 1  
-------------------------  
Status: [disable]  
-------  
A - Append, I - Insert, D - Delete, E - Edit, C - Clear all  
N - Next screen, P - Previous screen, S - Status change  
ESC - return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-82. Script Setup Menu  
The FCD-IPM scripting tool allows you to negotiate an initial login, required by  
some ISPs. The initial login usually consists of a username, password and possibly  
additional information which has to be entered to gain access to the ISP.  
Access Control (Security) Menu  
5-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
FCD-IPM script is a sequence of commands, with a maximum of 20 commands in  
the script. As soon as a physical connection to the remote host is achieved (and the  
script is enabled), FCD-IPM begins to forward the script. Script processing finishes  
when the last script command has been forwarded.  
FCD-IPM script comprises one or more command lines. Each command line  
consists of a Command Code followed by an Argument.  
Command Code  
The command codes are described in Table 5-28.  
Table 5-28. Command Codes  
Command Code  
Description  
waitcase pattern  
Waits until the specified case-sensitive pattern is received from the remote host and  
forwards the next command. The maximum pattern length is 24 characters.  
Or, waits until timeout (default = 15 seconds). The link then disconnects and  
FCD-IPM performs the same actions as required during authentication failure.  
waitnocase pattern  
Same as waitcase pattern except not case sensitive.  
send pattern  
Transmits specified pattern to remote host. The pattern can contain any recognized  
control symbols. The maximum pattern length is 24 characters.  
sendhide pattern  
As above. However, the pattern is displayed on the screen as asterisks. The control  
symbol is displayed as two asterisks when editing and as one when viewing.  
timeout number  
Changes the timeout for waitcase, waitnocase and getip commands. The number is  
the timeout value, in seconds. This value can be any number from 1 to 99 and will be  
used until the next timeout command.  
delay number  
The delay in seconds between sending commands. All symbols received during this  
time will be ignored. This value can be any number from 1 to 99.  
getip number  
This command waits for an IP address from the remote host. If the remote host  
returns several IP addresses in a string, the number specified by this command will  
determine which IP address should be used.  
If an IP address is received successfully from the host, and the Single IP feature is  
enabled, the IP address will be used on FCD-IPM WAN interface. If an IP address is  
not received successfully within the specified timeout period, the link disconnects.  
5-78  
Access Control (Security) Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Argument  
The argument is any string without apostrophes, quotation marks or unsigned  
integers (depending on the command). In addition to ASCII symbols, the argument  
string can include any control characters with ASCII codes from 1 to 31. While  
editing scripting commands, these symbols are entered in the ‘control’ mode i.e.  
each symbol is entered as "^", followed by the corresponding ASCII character  
from "A" to "[". The letters must be in upper case. Refer to Table 5-29.  
Table 5-29. Example of Argument  
Code to wait/send  
0x0A (line feed)  
Control Sequence  
^J  
0x0D (carriage return)  
0x0B (escape)  
^M  
^[  
Access Control (Security) Menu  
5-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
5.5 WAN Economy Menu  
Select this option to reduce traffic over the WAN and to keep the link up only  
when necessary  
Advanced  
Menu  
1
Setup  
5
2
Device  
Control  
WAN  
Economy  
1
2
3
Connection  
On Demand  
Spoofing  
Filters  
1. Block and  
Forwarding  
1. Keep Alive Mode  
1. Start Connection  
2. RIP/SAP  
Spoofing Tables  
Updated Timeout  
2. Terminate  
Connection  
2. IP/IPX Broadcast  
Control  
3. Minimum Time  
Between Two  
Connects  
3. Change Link  
Spoofing Mode  
3. Quick Filters  
4. Minimum Time  
Between Two  
Disconnects  
4. Advanced  
Filters  
5. Connect  
Manually  
6. Disconnect  
Manually  
Figure 5-83. WAN Economy Menu Outline  
ꢀ
To access the WAN Economy menu:  
1. In the Advanced Menu, press 1.  
The Setup menu appears.  
2. In the Setup menu, press 5.  
The WAN Economy menu appears (refer to Figure 5-84).  
5-80  
WAN Economy Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
WAN ECONOMY (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
-----------  
Use these features:  
- to reduce traffic over the WAN to a minimum and increase throughput  
- to keep the link up only when it is required  
1. Filters  
2. Connection on demand  
3. Spoofing  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-84. WAN Economy Menu  
The options in the WAN Economy menu are described below.  
Filters  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓5  
WAN Economy Menu  
↓1  
Filters Menu  
FILTERS ( Device name – FCD-IPM )  
-------  
1. Block and Forwarding  
2. IP / IPX broadcast control - [Block Propagation]  
3. Quick filters  
4. Advanced filters  
Esc - Return to main menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-85. Filters Menu  
Filtering allows you to limit the amount of traffic that enters and exits the Small  
Office LAN via FCD-IPM. If FCD-IPM is attached to more than one LAN, then  
select this option for each LAN interface. Filtering is used to:  
•
•
Increase security  
Reduce traffic to the link.  
WAN Economy Menu  
5-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
FCD-IPM features two types of filters:  
•
•
Quick Filters  
Advanced Filters.  
Quick Filters are used to regulate specific protocols:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IP  
IPX  
SNA  
NetBIOS  
AppleTalk  
DECnet.  
Others  
A Quick Filter can neutralize these protocols by blocking all traffic of that protocol  
from the LINK inwards. Refer to Figure 5-86.  
Link  
Traffic to the  
FCD-IPM  
LAN is Blocked  
by Quick Filter  
Quick Filter  
Figure 5-86. Action of a Quick Filter  
Advanced Filters are used to regulate traffic in both directions. (Refer to  
Figure 5-87).  
•
•
From LAN to the Link. Using filters here will forward or block traffic from the  
LAN outwards.  
From Link to the LAN. Using filters here will forward or block traffic from the  
link inwards.  
Using a variety of parameters, Advanced Filters can be used to regulate different  
protocols, to totally or partially block traffic, and to control traffic between links.  
5-82  
WAN Economy Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Link  
LAN to Link Filter  
Traffic is Regulated  
Traffic is Regulated  
FCD-IPM  
Link to LAN Filter  
Figure 5-87. Action of an Advanced Filter  
There are two modes through which filtering can be implemented: blocking and  
forwarding.  
Blocking  
The block command causes FCD-IPM to test every packet of data that is sent to or  
from the LAN. If the packet passes the test, passage is denied.  
Example:  
You want to ensure that IP/UDP packets do not go on to the link in the direction  
of the Internet/Intranet. Thus, you design a filter, which tests each packet to see if  
it is an IP/UDP packet. If the packet tests positive, it is automatically blocked.  
Forwarding  
The forward command works in the same way as the block command. However,  
with forwarding, if the packet passes the test, the packet is allowed to pass to or  
from the LAN.  
Example:  
To allow a certain user on the Small Office LAN to access the Internet for FTP  
purposes, create a filter to test each packet for the IP host address of the specified  
user and the FTP socket of the packet. If the packet passes the test, the packet is  
forwarded to the Internet/Intranet.  
Multiple Filters  
Up to 18 filters can be defined. If there are 2 filters that have contradictory  
operations, forwarding takes precedence over blocking.  
Example:  
You want to allow only one particular user on the Small Office LAN to access the  
Internet for FTP purposes. To insure that no one else is able to access the Internet,  
create a blocking filter for all traffic going to the link. To do this, from the Blocking  
and Forwarding menu enter Block all traffic for Link1. In addition, create a filter to  
test each packet for the IP host address of the specified user and the FTP socket of  
the packet. Since forwarding takes precedence over blocking, that user's frames are  
forwarded.  
WAN Economy Menu  
5-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Definition of Filter Tests  
You need to define the filter test which will be applied to every packet that is  
transmitted. Use any combination of the following parameters to define the filter  
test:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Protocol  
Operation (block, forward, etc.)  
Interface (LAN, Link)  
Destination and/or source IP address of the packet  
Destination and/or source MAC address of the packet (layer 2)  
IP socket (upper and lower level)  
IP packet type (broadcast, multicast).  
Note  
Up to 18 filters can be defined. To avoid reducing FCD-IPM performance, minimize  
the number of active filters.  
Defining Filters  
Filters can be defined through the control port, TELNET or SNMP. First decide on  
the mode and conditions for a filter, then follow the instructions below to set filter  
parameters.  
Note  
Remember that forwarding takes precedence over blocking. If there is a  
combination of filters which contain both operations, the frame will be forwarded.  
Quick Filters  
Figure 5-88 shows a Quick Filters menu.  
FILTERS (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
1. Block and Forwarding  
2. IP / IPX broadcast control - [Full Propagation]  
3. Quick filters  
4. Advanced filters  
Esc - Return to main menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-88. Filters Menu  
5-84  
WAN Economy Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
ꢀ
To configure the operation:  
1. From the Filters menu, choose Block and Forwarding.  
2. Toggle between Block and Forward.  
ꢀ
To configure the broadcast control:  
The broadcast control filter manages special frames, normally not propagated  
throughout the network. The frames managed are:  
•
•
•
IP - Local broadcast propagation  
IPX - Zero destination propagation, IPX Type 20 frames propagation  
NETBIOS over IP - IP frames with TCP/UDP ports 137, 138, 139 propagation.  
From the Filters menu, press 2 to toggle between Full Propagation and Block  
Propagation.  
Factory default: Block Propagation.  
Quick Filters are defined per protocol. Configure each protocol that you want to  
block or forward.  
ꢀ
To configure the Quick Filter parameters:  
1. From the Filters menu, choose Quick Filters.  
The Quick Filters menu appears (refer to Figure 5-89).  
2. To toggle between Forward/Block, press the number of the protocol that you  
want to filter.  
QUICK FILTERS (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
Choose the protocols you want to block or forward!!:  
(The Blocking or forwarding is to interface LAN 1 only)  
1. IP  
NO FILTERS  
NO FILTERS  
NO FILTERS  
NO FILTERS  
2. IPX  
3. SNA  
4. NetBIOS  
5. AppleTalk NO FILTERS  
6. DECnet  
7. Others  
NO FILTERS  
NO FILTERS  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-89. Quick Filters Menu  
WAN Economy Menu  
5-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
In FCD-IPM 2 LANs configuration:  
For LAN1, use Quick Filters  
Note  
For LAN2, use Advanced Filter.  
Advanced Filters  
There are 4 steps in defining an Advanced Filter:  
1. From the Advanced Setup menu, choose:  
Set up → WAN Economy → Filters.  
2. Choose Advanced Filter.  
3. If you are defining a new filter, choose Add.  
If you are editing a filter, choose Edit and enter the filter number.  
4. Define the desired parameters.  
Advanced Filter Concepts  
When defining an advanced filter the following parameters must be determined:  
•
Filter ID - A selection number used to view, edit or delete a particular file. To  
work with any filter, the Filter ID number must be entered.  
Add Filters Menu  
ADD FILTERS ( Device name - FCD-IPM )  
ENTER  
SPACE  
N
- Enter data  
- Toggle (parameters inside [] )  
- Next line (skip this one)  
- Move right  
SPACE  
BACKSPACE - Move left  
ESC  
- Return to previous menu  
Filter Id - 1  
Figure 5-90. Add Filters Menu  
Table 5-30 lists the terms used in the filters menu.  
5-86  
WAN Economy Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Table 5-30. Add Filters Menu Terms  
Terms  
Description  
Protocol  
Protocol on which the filter operates  
Action of the filter  
Operation  
Interface  
Filter interface  
Source Address  
Destination Address  
High level (IP only)  
Source/Destination Port  
Source/Destination Socket  
Low Level  
Source address of passing frames  
Destination address of passing frames  
Includes or excludes high-level protocols  
Port source/destination address of an application  
Socket source/destination address of an application  
Includes or excludes the low level protocols  
Mask filter  
Mask  
Status  
Filter's status  
True-False Menus  
Many of the Advanced Filter parameters can be configured so that:  
•
•
Frames with that parameter pass (true)  
Frames without that parameter pass (false).  
For example, if you choose BroadCast-True, any frame which BroadCast will  
is  
BroadCast will pass.  
pass. If you choose BroadCast-False, any frame which  
is not  
Advanced Filter Parameters  
Table 5-31. Advanced Filter Parameters  
Possible Values Description  
Parameter  
Filter ID  
System automatically assigns a new number to each filter  
Protocol on which the filter operates  
Protocol  
Operation  
Forward  
Block  
Connect  
Disconnect  
Action which the filter applies to a frame that passes  
The operations are listed in their order of priority. For  
example if the connect and disconnect commands are  
applied to a frame, the connect command takes  
precedence.  
Note: Connect and disconnect are only relevant to  
Connection on Demand. When accessed through the Filter  
menu, only they appear.  
WAN Economy Menu  
5-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Table 5-31. Advanced Filter Parameters (Cont.)  
Parameter  
Possible Values  
Description  
Interface  
Area where the filters will act. If you want to filter traffic  
going to the LAN, choose LAN. If you want to filter traffic  
going to the link, choose Link.  
Source Address  
Toggle to the desired address type (MAC or NET). The  
address format (hexadecimal or binary) appears. Type in  
the complete source address.  
If you want to include a group of addresses, type <x> to  
indicate "Don't care". For example, a filter with the MAC  
source address the 4020.D2FE.xxxx will pass any address  
beginning with 4020.D2FE. You select IP RANGE to filter a  
group of sequential IP addresses.  
Destination  
Address  
MAC  
NET  
All  
Toggle to the desired address type. The address format  
(hexadecimal or binary) appears. Type in the complete  
destination address. Choose True or False.  
BroadCast  
MultiCast  
Normally, a frame has a particular destination, as specified  
in the destination address field of the frame. Such frames  
are referred to as "All" frames. "BroadCast" frames are  
intended for all stations. If you specify "BroadCast" do not  
specify a mask pattern. Select IP RANGE to filter a group  
of sequential IP addresses.  
High Level  
Yes, No  
When you choose this parameter, 2 choices appear:Yes  
and No.  
When Yes is chosen, a list of High Level protocols appear.  
The High Level protocols include:  
FTP  
WWW  
TELNET  
E-MAIL  
TFTP  
SNMP  
DNS  
RIP.  
Choose True or False for each protocol to be filtered.  
Source/  
This parameter differs for IP and IPX.  
Destination  
Sockets  
IP – The Destination Port is enabled when no High Level  
protocol is specified. If you define a port number in  
decimal numbers, define the low level protocol as UTP or  
TCP. If no port number is defined, define the low level  
protocol as UTP, TCP, or ICMP. Choose True or False  
IPX – If a socket address or low level protocol is not  
defined, a socket number may be specified. Choose True  
or False.  
5-88  
WAN Economy Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Table 5-31. Advanced Filter Parameters (Cont.)  
Parameter  
Possible Values  
Description  
Low Level (IP  
protocol)  
UTP  
TCP  
ICMP  
Toggle to the required low level protocol for the filter. If  
the port number is defined in decimal format, specify the  
low level protocol as UTP or TCP. If no port number is  
defined, specify the low level protocol as UTP, TCP, or  
ICMP. Choose True or False.  
Low Level (IPX  
protocol)  
Toggle to the required low level protocol for the filter. If a  
socket is defined in the destination address, a low level  
protocol or socket number may not be specified.  
Conversely, if a socket address or low level is not defined,  
a socket number may be specified.  
Mask  
A mask is a test pattern that is used to allow certain frame  
patterns only. You define a code against which the frame  
is compared.  
To create a mask, toggle to Yes. Three pairs of codes and  
offsets must be created. The offset defines the point in the  
frame at which the comparison is made.  
For example, an offset of 8 means that the 8th byte is  
compared to the code. The offset can be from the 7th byte  
onwards.  
The frame is made of 3 different portions:  
MAC - is at the beginning of the frame  
LLC - is after the source address in the frame  
DATA - is after the LLC section in the frame.  
For each code-offset pair, select the code format:  
Binary - specify 48 address bits to be either 0,1, or X  
(unspecified)  
Hexadecimal - specify 12 hex digits to be 0-F or X  
(unspecified).  
For each code-offset pair, choose True or False.  
Every frame, at the designated offsets, is compared to the  
three codes in the mask. If all three codes and the  
True-False condition match the code written in the frame,  
the frame passes.  
Note: Only one mask can be defined.  
Status  
Active  
The filter is in use.  
Not Active  
Allows you to define filters which can be stored and used  
at a later time.  
Saving Filter Parameters  
All filters are stored in the Flash Memory, thereby preserving them if the power  
goes down. When filtering is selected, all of the filters are copied into the RAM.  
The RAM copy is then used to activate the software filtering process. Any filter  
which is modified, (by clearing all, deleting one, or changing a parameter) goes  
into effect immediately. The previous filter also remains in effect until the system is  
rebooted.  
WAN Economy Menu  
5-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
To exit filtering and return to the main Setup menu, press <Esc>. The following  
prompt appears: 'up' (Y/N)?  
Press Y to save changes in the Flash Memory. Press N to cancel your changes. The  
system loads the previous set of masks the next time the system is rebooted.  
Connection on Demand  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓5  
WAN Economy Menu  
↓2  
Connection on Demand  
Connection On Demand (Device name - FCD-IPM)  
--------------------  
1. Start Connection  
2. Terminate Connection  
3. Minimum Time Between Two Connects  
4. Minimum Time Between Two Disconnects  
5. Connect Manually  
6. Disconnect Manually  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-91. Connection On Demand Menu  
To save money, you may want to limit the time that a link is kept open. COD  
allows you to determine the traffic conditions that open and close the link. Using  
COD, a line is opened only when traffic conditions fulfill specified conditions.  
When there is no need for a connection, the line is automatically terminated.  
COD is only effective if:  
•
•
•
The line is connected to a modem or ISDN (a dialup link)  
The link is asynchronous  
The connection type is Originate or Answer&Originate.  
If the connection type is Answer only, the line connection is started when the unit  
is turned on in order to receive calls. If the connection type is Originate only or  
Answer&Originate the connection starts when a telephone number is defined.  
5-90  
WAN Economy Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
You need to configure:  
•
•
Start Connection  
Terminate Connection.  
Table 5-32. Connection On Demand Parameters  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Description  
Start Connection  
Start Connection is used to determine under which conditions is a  
line established. To use this function, the line must not be  
designated as answer only. After a physical connection is made,  
data is transferred.  
Upon Power Up  
The line is established when the unit is turned on. Upon Power Up  
is recommended for leased lines only  
Any Frame to  
Forward  
The line is established when any frame that is directed to the link  
arrives  
Specific Frame to  
Forward  
The line is established only when specific types of frames directed  
to the link arrive. To determine which frames establish a line, filters  
are used to specify the type of frame.  
Any number of filters can be used. Filters work as a Boolean "OR";  
by specifying a filter for frame type A and filter for frame type B,  
you establish a line for Frame type A or Frame type B.  
Choosing this option automatically opens the Advanced Filter  
menu, with Connect Operation selected  
Never  
Never  
The line is permanently cutoff. In this case, you manually decide  
when to activate a line.  
Terminate Connection  
Terminate Connection is used to determine under which conditions  
does a link terminates. Termination takes place only after a physical  
connection is made.  
The line is never terminated. Never is usually used when Upon  
Power Up is used  
No Frame to  
Forward  
The line is terminated after a specified time passes without a frame  
passing through the line. You specify the time in which a frame  
must pass. The default is 60 seconds  
Upon Time Out  
The line is terminated after a fixed period of time regardless of the  
traffic. The default is 60 seconds  
No Specific Frame  
to Forward  
The line is terminated if traffic of a specific type of frame falls below  
a certain rate over a period of time. You determine the number of  
frames and the time period in which they must pass. Using filters,  
you specify which type of frames are counted. If frames other than  
those specified pass through, they are not counted.  
Choosing this option automatically opens the Advanced Filter menu  
WAN Economy Menu  
5-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Table 5-32. Connection On Demand Parameters (Cont.)  
Possible Values Description  
Parameters  
Minimum Time  
Between 2  
Connections  
Determines how much time there must be between a line being  
terminated and then reactivated. This option is only used when  
upon power up is chosen in start connection. All other options are  
determined by the frame traffic  
Minimum Time  
Between 2  
Disconnections  
Determines the minimum time between two disconnections. Using  
this option allows you to determine a minimum time-up. This  
option overrides other terminate connection options  
Connect Manually  
Activates a line immediately. This option overrides any other  
connection option, including minimum time between 2 connections  
Disconnect Manually  
Terminates a line immediately. This option overrides any other  
terminate option, including minimum time between 2  
disconnections  
The following examples demonstrate how COD can be used.  
Example 1:  
A company needs their FCD-IPM to be connected to the Internet 24 hours a day.  
Therefore the following must be defined:  
Start connection is upon power up  
Terminate Connection is never (see Figure 5-92).  
The connection is  
permanent  
ISDN  
INTERNET  
FCD-IPM  
Connection is never  
terminated  
Figure 5-92. Permanent Connection  
5-92  
WAN Economy Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
Example 2:  
To lower expenses, FCD-IPM is configured so that a line to the Internet is activated  
when there is a need to connect to the Internet and terminates when no frames  
are transmitted for 60 seconds. Therefore the following must be defined:  
•
•
Start Connection is any frame to forward  
Terminate Connection is no frame to forward for 60 seconds (see Figure 5-93).  
Any frame starts a  
connection  
ISDN  
INTERNET  
FCD-IPM  
Connection is terminated if  
3 frames/60 seconds are  
not forwarded  
Figure 5-93. Any Frame Starts a Connection  
Example 3:  
The company management wants to allow the PC with the IP address 1.2.3.4 only  
access to the Internet. In addition, the connection to the Internet is to be  
terminated if 3 frames every 60 seconds are not transmitted from this PC.  
Therefore the following must be defined:  
•
Start connection must be specific frame to forward. A filter which allows only  
frames from the 1.2.3.4 IP address must be defined.  
•
Terminate connection must be no specific frame to forward. A filter which  
counts only frames from the 1.2.3.4 IP address must be defined. In addition  
the rate must be defined at 3 frames/60 seconds (see Figure 5-94).  
WAN Economy Menu  
5-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
PC 1.2.3.4 is able to  
connect to Internet  
1.2.3.4  
PC 1.2.3.5 is blocked from  
the Internet  
1.2.3.5  
1.2.3.6  
1.2.3.7  
FCD-IPM  
INTERNET  
P.T.T.  
Connection is terminated if  
Modem  
3 frames/60 seconds from  
PC 1.2.3.4 are not  
forwarded  
PC 1.2.3.6 is blocked from  
the Internet  
PC 1.2.3.7 is blocked from  
the Internet  
Figure 5-94. Limiting Access to a Specific PC  
Example 4:  
A company uses a phone line which uses a phone and modem to connect to the  
Internet. The only time that the employees may connect to the Internet is if they  
need to upload or download files to a FTP site. Any connection to the Internet is to  
be done manually. After the file has been uploaded or downloaded the  
connection is to be terminated automatically. Therefore the following must be  
defined:  
•
Start connection must be never. Any time someone wants to connect, the user  
must connect manually.  
•
•
Terminate connection must be upon time out. The time is set to 30 seconds.  
Set filter to FTP only forwarded (see Figure 5-95).  
5-94  
WAN Economy Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
The connection is manual  
FCD-IPM  
INTERNET  
Modem  
Connection is terminated if  
no frame passes within 30  
seconds  
Figure 5-95. Manual Connection  
Spoofing  
Advanced Menu  
↓1  
Setup Menu  
↓5  
WAN Economy Menu  
↓3  
Spoofing Menu  
IP/IPX SPOOFING ( Device name – FCD-IPM )  
---------------  
Keep Alive (IPX)  
----------------  
1. Keep Alive mode: [Disabled]  
RIP / SAP spoofing (IP/IPX)  
---------------------------  
2. RIP/SAP spoofing tables updated timeout (minutes): 30  
3. Change link spoofing mode  
Link 1 spoofing mode: Disabled  
Link 2 spoofing mode: Disabled  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure 5-96. IP/IPX Spoofing Menu  
Spoofing is a technique used to reduce network overhead, especially in wide area  
networks (WAN). Some network protocols send frequent packets for management  
purposes. These can be routing updates or keep-alive messages. In a WAN this can  
introduce significant overhead, due to the typically smaller bandwidth of WAN  
connections.  
Spoofing reduces the required bandwidth by having devices, such as bridges or  
WAN Economy Menu  
5-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
routers, answer for the remote devices. This fools (spoofs) the LAN device into  
thinking that the remote LAN is still connected, even though it is not. The spoofing  
saves the WAN bandwidth, because no packet is ever sent out on the WAN.  
Configure the following parameters for the Spoofing Menu.  
Table 5-33. IP/IPX Spoofing Parameters  
Parameters  
Possible Values  
Enable  
Description  
Keep Alive (IPX)  
Enables/Disables the Keep Alive mode. Keep Alive mode allows the  
remote user to remain on the local server station list for a specified  
period of time during link disconnection  
Disable  
Note: SPX spoofing is not supported.  
RIP/SAP Spoofing  
(IP/IPX)  
Spoofing is a technique used to reduce network overhead, especially  
in a WAN. Some network protocols send frequent packets for  
management purposes. These can be routing updates or keep-alive  
messages. In a WAN this can introduce significant overhead, due to  
the typically smaller bandwidth of WAN connections.  
Select this parameter to determine the length of time (in minutes)  
between exchange of RIP and IPX SAP tables over the WAN. This  
parameter is applicable unless spoofing mode is set to "Upon  
Change" only.  
Change Link  
Disabled (default)  
When disabled, RIP/SAP updates are sent:  
Spoofing Mode  
• After a defined time (default time is 30 seconds IP, 60 seconds  
IPX RIP and SAP)  
• When there is a change in the network topology; for example an  
interface goes up or down, or a routing entry aged  
Enabled  
When enabled, RIP/SAP updates are sent:  
• After a defined time  
• When there is a change in the network topology  
• After a defined time and a change in network topology  
When this parameter is set to Enabled COD, updates are sent  
according to:  
Enabled COD  
• The disabled parameter when the line is up.  
• The enabled parameter when the line down.  
5-96  
WAN Economy Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
5.6 Factory Default Options  
The Factory Default menu allows you to change all configuration parameters,  
returning configuration parameters back to their factory defaults.  
Advanced Menu  
1
Setup  
6
2
Factory Default Options  
Device Control  
Figure 5-97. Factory Default Menu Outline  
ꢀ
To access the Factory Default menu:  
1. In the Advanced Setup menu, press 1.  
The Setup menu appears.  
2. From the Setup menu, press 6.  
3. Type Yes to reset the parameters to the factory default. Press any other key if  
you do not want to reset.  
Factory Default Options  
5-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Setup Menu  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
5-98  
Factory Default Options  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
Troubleshooting and  
Diagnostics  
This chapter includes:  
•
•
•
General troubleshooting (see Table 6-1)  
E1, T1 and voice troubleshooting (see Table 6-2)  
Router connections troubleshooting (see Table 6-3).  
6.1 General Troubleshooting  
Table 6-1. General Troubleshooting  
Possible cause Recommended Course of Action  
Trouble symptoms  
All front panel indicators are  
OFF  
The unit is not receiving power Check that power is supplied to the unit.  
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.  
READY indication is OFF  
There are less then two  
interfaces UP  
Check VIEW interface connection status  
6.2 E1/T1 and Voice Troubleshooting  
Table 6-2. E1, T1 and Voice Troubleshooting  
Trouble symptoms  
Possible cause  
Recommended Course of Action  
Local sync loss (for E1) or RED  
alarm (for T1) indicator is ON  
in the main link  
External problem  
Check the E1/T1 cable.  
Check the E1/T1 cable.  
Local sync loss (for E1) or RED  
alarm (for T1) indicator is ON  
in a sub link  
External problem  
SHDSL and/or E1  
SHDSL status remains in  
‘handshake’ or ‘training’ mode configuration problem  
• Check that SHDSL parameters of  
the local and remote units are set  
to the same values.  
• Check that the same number of  
timeslots are configured to carry  
data.  
E1/T1 and Voice Troubleshooting  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
6.3 Router Connections Troubleshooting  
The IP router can be connected to other IP networks by the LAN and WAN.  
Operating the PING terminal sending PING frames to IP HOST indicates the  
availability of the connection in IP level. When the PING terminal gets responds  
continuously from the IP HOST the IP connection is UP.  
IP connection to LAN is DOWN  
See LAN indicators, VIEW --> INTERFACE CONNECTION and VIEW-->  
ROUTING TABLES --> IP ROUTING  
Table 6-3. Router Connections Troubleshooting  
Trouble symptoms  
Possible cause  
Recommended Course of Action  
LAN error indication ON  
permanently  
1. LAN status is DISABLE  
Check VIEW interface connection  
status.  
2. Problem with LAN cable or  
HUB  
Check LAN cable and HUB.  
LAN error indication is blinking Problem with LAN cable or  
HUB  
Check LAN cable and HUB.  
Physical connection OK but no IP configuration problem  
IP connection  
Look for mistakes in IP routing table,  
HOST IP addresses, default gateway.  
IP Connection to WAN is DOWN  
See WAN indicators, VIEW --> CONFIGURATION , VIEW --> INTERFACE  
CONNECTION and VIEW--> ROUTING TABLES --> IP ROUTING  
Table 6-4. IP Connection to WAN Troubleshooting  
Trouble symptoms  
Possible cause  
Recommended Course of Action  
WAN error indication ON  
permanently or connection  
status shows “sync not obtain”  
1. In synchronous link –  
receive clock (RCLK) is 0 kbps  
Check VIEW configuration – baud  
rate 0 kbps indicates line physical  
problem.  
2. WAN Line physical  
Problem.  
Check WAN cable and modem.  
WAN error indication ON  
permanently or connection  
status shows “sync not obtain”  
WAN Line physical Problem  
Check WAN cable and modem.  
E1/T1 alarm indicators ON or  
blinking or connection status  
shows E1/T1 alarms  
E1/T1 physical problem  
See E1/T1 troubleshooting.  
For PPP: connection status  
shows “sync not obtain”  
There is physical connection  
but no PPP connection  
Check if the unit opposite is ON.  
Check PPP configuration of FCD-IPM  
and the unit opposite.  
6-2  
Router Connections Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
Table 6-4. IP Connection to WAN Troubleshooting (Cont.)  
Trouble symptoms  
Possible cause  
Recommended Course of Action  
For PPP: connection status  
shows “LCP”  
PPP connection establish but  
no IPCP connection  
Check PPP configuration of FCD-IPM  
and the unit opposite.  
For Frame Relay: connection  
status shows “port down”  
There is physical connection  
but no frame relay port UP  
Check connection between modem  
and frame relay switch.  
Check FCD-IPM and switch  
configuration.  
For Frame Relay: link  
There is physical connection  
UP and frame relay port UP  
but specific DLCI is down  
Check if the unit opposite the DLCI is  
ON.  
connection status shows “port  
UP” and DLCI connection  
shows “DLCI down”  
Check FCD-IPM, frame relay switch  
and the opposite unit configuration.  
Physical and logical  
connections are OK but no IP  
connection  
IP configuration problem  
Look for mistakes in IP routing table,  
HOST IP addresses, default gateway.  
Router Connections Troubleshooting  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
6-4  
Router Connections Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
Interface Specifications and  
Cable Diagrams  
This appendix lists the cable types and connector specifications.  
A.1 Interface Signal List (Female Connectors)  
The following section provides information on the different interfaces for the  
FCD-IPM. Table A-1 provides a list of interface signals.  
Table A-1. Interface Signal List (Female Connectors)  
SIGNAL  
FUNCTION  
SOURCE V.24/  
RS-232  
V.35**  
34-PIN  
(FEMALE)  
EIA-530  
DB-25  
(FEMALE)  
V.36/  
X.21*  
DB-15  
(FEMALE)  
PIN  
DESCRIPTION  
RS-449**  
DB-37  
(FEMALE)  
PIN  
DB-25  
CIRCUIT  
[FUNCTION]  
PIN  
CIRCUIT PIN  
CIRCUIT  
FEMALE  
CIRCUIT  
Protective  
Ground  
COMMON 1  
A Frame  
101  
1
7
1
1
-
Chassis ground.  
May be isolated  
from Signal  
[shield]  
Ground.  
Signal  
Ground  
COMMON 7  
B Signal  
GND  
102  
AB  
19  
SG  
8
-
Common Signal  
and DC power  
supply ground.  
[GND]  
Transmitted DTE  
Data  
2
3
4
S TD(B)  
P TD(A)  
103  
103  
2
14  
BA (A)  
BA (B)  
4
22  
SD(A)  
SD(B)  
2
9
T(A)  
T(B)  
Serial data  
output from  
[TRANSMIT] FCD-IPM. The  
data transitions  
occur on the  
rising edge of  
the clock.  
Received  
Data  
DCE  
DTE  
E DSR  
104  
104  
3
16  
BB(A)  
BB(B)  
6
24  
RD(A)  
RD(B)  
4
11  
R(A)  
R(B)  
[RECEIVE]  
Serial data  
input to  
FCD-IPM. The  
data transitions  
occur on the  
rising edge of  
the clock.  
Request to  
Send  
C RTS  
D CTS  
105  
4
19  
CA(A)  
CA(B)  
7
25  
RS(A)  
RS(B)  
3
10  
C(A)  
C(B)  
ON from the  
unit upon  
[CONTROL] completion of  
Self-Test.  
Clear To  
Send  
DCE  
DCE  
5
6
106  
107  
5
13  
CB(A)  
CB(B)  
9
27-  
CS(A)  
CS(B)  
-
-
-
-
FCD-IPM  
expects CTS  
ON.  
Data Set  
Ready  
6
22  
CC(A)  
CC(B)  
11  
29  
DM(A)  
DM(B)  
Not used.  
Interface Signal List (Female Connectors)  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Interface Specifications and Cable Diagrams  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Table A-1. Interface Signal List (Female Connectors) (Cont.)  
SIGNAL  
FUNCTION  
SOURCE V.24/  
RS-232  
V.35**  
34-PIN  
(FEMALE)  
EIA-530  
DB-25  
(FEMALE)  
V.36/  
X.21*  
DB-15  
(FEMALE)  
PIN  
DESCRIPTION  
RS-449**  
DB-37  
(FEMALE)  
PIN  
DB-25  
CIRCUIT  
[FUNCTION]  
PIN  
CIRCUIT PIN  
CIRCUIT  
FEMALE  
CIRCUIT  
Data  
Terminal  
Ready  
DTE  
20  
H DTR  
108  
20  
23  
CD(A)  
CD(A)  
12  
30  
TR(A)  
TR(B)  
-
-
ON when  
FCD-IPM is  
ready to  
transmit or  
receive data.  
Carrier  
Detect  
DCE  
DCE  
8
F DCD  
109  
8
10  
CF(A)  
CF(B)  
13  
31  
RR(A)  
RR(B)  
5
12  
I(A)  
1(B)  
[INDICATION]  
Unit expects  
DCD ON  
Transmit  
Clock  
15  
Y SCT(A)  
A SCT(B)  
114  
114  
15  
12  
DB(A)  
DB(B)  
5
23  
ST(A)  
ST(B)  
6
13  
S(A)  
S(B)  
[SIGNAL  
TIMING]  
FCD-IPM  
requires clock  
for  
synchronization  
(in synchronous  
mode).  
Receive  
Clock  
DCE  
17  
X SCR(B)  
V SCR(A)  
115  
115  
17  
9
DD(A)  
DD(B)  
8
26  
RT(A)  
RT(B)  
-
-
FCD-IPM  
requires clock  
for  
synchronization  
(in synchronous  
mode).  
*The X.21 connection is made by an RS-530 to X.21 conversion cable supplied  
with the RS-530 model.  
**The V.36/RS-449 connection is made by an RS-530 to V.36 conversion cable  
supplied with the RS-530 model.  
A-2  
Interface Signal List (Female Connectors)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Appendix A Interface Specifications and Cable Diagrams  
Figure A-1 shows the pinout for the cable supplied with the X.21 interface.  
X.21 / 15-pin  
RS-530  
Shield  
1
7
4
1
Shield  
Signal GND  
RTS-a  
8
3
Signal GND  
C-a  
10  
C-b  
RTS-b  
CTS-a  
CTS-b  
DCD-a  
DCD-b  
TC-a  
19  
5
13  
8
5
I-a  
10  
15  
12  
17  
9
12  
6
I-b  
S-a  
S-b  
13  
TC-b  
RC-a  
RC-b  
TD-a  
2
9
T-a  
T-b  
2
TD-b  
14  
3
RD-a  
RD-b  
4
R-a  
R-b  
16  
11  
Figure A-1 Cable Supplied for X.21 Interface  
Interface Signal List (Female Connectors)  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Interface Specifications and Cable Diagrams  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Figure A-2 shows the pinout for the cable supplied with the V.36 interface.  
RS-449/V.36 37-pin  
RS-530  
Shield  
TD-a  
TD-b  
1
1
Shield  
2
4
SD-a  
SD-b  
22  
14  
6
RD-a  
RD-b  
RS-a  
RS-b  
CS-a  
CS-b  
DM-a  
DM-b  
TR-a  
TR-b  
RD-a  
3
16  
4
RD-b  
24  
7
RTS-a  
RTS-b  
CTS-a  
CTS-b  
DSR-a  
DSR-b  
DTR-a  
DTR-b  
Sig. GND  
DCD-a  
DCD-b  
TC-a  
25  
9
19  
5
13  
6
27  
11  
29  
12  
30  
22  
20  
23  
7
19, 20, 37 SG  
8
13  
31  
5
RR-a  
10  
15  
12  
17  
9
RR-b  
ST-a  
ST-b  
23  
TC-b  
RC-a  
8
RT-a  
RT-b  
LL  
RC-b  
26  
10  
14  
17  
35  
18  
LL  
18  
21  
24  
11  
25  
RL  
RL  
EXT-CK-a  
EXT-CK-b  
TM  
TT-a  
TT-b  
TM  
Figure A-2. Cable supplied for V.36 interface  
A-4  
Interface Signal List (Female Connectors)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Appendix A Interface Specifications and Cable Diagrams  
A.2 E1/T1 Connectors  
The following section provides information on the main and sub link connectors.  
The connectors are provided as follows:  
•
The unbalanced interface of the E1 and SUB E1 links are terminated in two  
BNC connectors. The connectors are designated RX-IN and TX-OUT.  
•
The balanced interface of the E1, SUB E1, T1 and SUB T1 are terminated in an  
eight-pin RJ-45 connector, wired in accordance with Table A-2.  
Table A-2. E1/T1 and SUB E1/T1 Link Connectors, Pin Allocation  
Pin  
1
Designation  
RD(T)  
RD(R)  
FG  
Direction  
Input  
Input  
↔
Function  
Receive data (tip)  
Receive data (ring)  
Frame ground  
2
3
4
TD(T)  
TD(R)  
FG  
Output  
Output  
↔
Transmit data (tip)  
Transmit data (ring)  
Frame ground  
5
6
7,8  
Not connected  
Note  
To connect the PABX to the SUB E1/T1 link, use a cross cable.  
A.3 E1 over SHDSL Line Connector  
The following section provides information on the 2-wire SHDSL main link  
connectors. Figure A-3 illustrates location of the pins in the E1 over SHDSL  
connector.  
4 5  
Figure A-3. E1 over SHDSL Connector Pin Location  
Control Cable Connector  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Interface Specifications and Cable Diagrams  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
A.4 Control Cable Connector  
The control cable connection pinout is provided in Table A-3.  
Table A-3. Control Cable RJ-45 to DB-9 Connection (DCE)  
RJ-45  
DB-9  
Pin 4 GND  
Pin 5 TX  
Pin 6 RX  
Pin 7 RTS  
Pin 8 CTS  
Pin 5 GND  
Pin 2 RX  
Pin 3 TX  
Pin 8 CTS  
Pin 7 RTS  
A-6  
Control Cable Connector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Appendix A Interface Specifications and Cable Diagrams  
A.5 ISDN Connector  
The ISDN connector pinout is provided in Table A-4.  
Table A-4. ISDN “S” Interface Pin Assignments  
Pin Number  
Signal Name  
3
4
5
6
Tx+  
Rx+  
Rx-  
Tx-  
A.6 Fiber Optic Interface  
FCD-IPM equipped with a fiber optic main link can be used to provide a secure  
link in hazardous or hostile environments, increase the maximum connection  
range, and achieve immunity against electrical interference and protection against  
the deleterious effects of ground loops.  
The fiber optic main link interface is terminated in two ST, FC/PC or SC  
connectors, in accordance with order. Table A-5 lists the various available fiber  
optic interface types and their main specifications (Maximum ranges are calculated  
assuming a 3 dB margin).  
Table A-5. Fiber Optic Interface Specifications  
Wavelength [nm],  
Budget Typical Range  
Connector  
Fiber Type [µm]  
[dB]  
12  
[km/miles]  
3.5/2.1  
33/20.5  
50/31  
850, 62.5/125, multimode  
1310, 9/125, single mode  
1310L, 9/125, single mode  
1550L, 9/125, single mode  
SC, ST, FC  
SC, ST, FC  
SC, ST, FC  
SC, ST, FC  
15  
25  
25  
100/62  
All the fiber optic interface options offer high performance and have a wide  
dynamic range. This ensures that the receiver will not saturate even when using  
short fiber optic cables (saturation is caused when the optical power applied to the  
receiver exceeds its maximum allowed input power, and results in very high bit  
error rates).  
Fiber Optic Interface  
A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Interface Specifications and Cable Diagrams  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
A.7 E&M Connector  
The RJ-45 E&M connector wiring is provided in Table A-6.  
Table A-6. RJ-45 E&M Connector Wiring  
Pin  
1
Designation  
Function  
SB  
Signalling Battery  
2
M
M Lead input  
3
R1-OUT  
4-wire voice output  
2-wire voice input/output  
4-wire voice intput  
4-wire voice intput  
4-wire voice output  
2-wire voice input/output  
Function depends on signalling mode:  
4
5
6
R-IN  
T-IN  
T1-OUT  
7
SG  
RS-464 Type I, III  
Direct connection to singal ground RS-464 type V,  
SSDC5  
Connection to signal ground through 1.1 KΩ resistor  
RS-464 Type II SG lead  
8
E
E lead output  
A.8 FXO/FXS Connector  
The RJ-45 E&M connector wiring is provided in Table A-7.  
Table A-7. RJ-45 E&M Connector Wiring  
Pin  
1,2  
3
Designation  
Direction  
Function  
Not connected  
2W input/output  
2W input/output  
Not connected  
RING  
TIP  
IN/OUT  
IN/OUT  
4
5,6  
A-8  
FXO/FXS Connector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Boot Manager  
This appendix describes the various options of the Boot Manager.  
B.1 Preface  
FCD-IPM includes a Dual Image Flash, capable of storing two different versions of  
software in two different partitions.  
Upon reset, FCD-IPM automatically runs the program stored in the active  
partition.  
New software versions are loaded into the backup partition. If loading succeeds,  
the backup partition becomes the active partition and FCD-IPM is reset  
automatically, running the new software version. If loading fails, the device is still  
capable of working, since the Flash partition storing the old version remains active.  
The Boot Manager can control dual Image Flash. Use the Boot Manager to:  
•
•
•
•
Download new software  
Manually define the active and backup partitions  
Run the backup partition  
Erase some or all information from Flash.  
B.2 Accessing Boot Manager  
There are several ways to access Boot Manager:  
•
•
Via option 2 in the Software Download menu  
Via the “Rescue” option.  
Access via Software Download Menu  
ꢀ
To access Boot manager via Software Download menu:  
1. In the Advanced Menu, press 3. The Device Control menu appears.  
2. Press 1. The Software Download menu appears.  
3. Press 2 to display the Boot Manager menu.  
Accessing Boot Manager  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Boot Manager  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Rescue  
If FCD-IPM does not respond properly, try the Rescue option:  
1. Connect the ASCII terminal to FCD-IPM.  
2. Switch on FCD-IPM and immediately press R. The Boot Manager menu  
appears.  
B.3 The Boot Manager Menu  
Following is a screen display of the Boot manager menu. The options in the Boot  
Manager menu are described in Figure B-1.  
BOOT 302 Version 1.04 (Jan 27 1998)  
Active : 1998 Apr 16 14:56 FCD-IPM  
Backup : 1998 Apr 16 14:56 FCD-IPM  
Load new software  
Partitions status  
Run second partition  
Reactivate second partition  
Duplicate first partition  
Erase configuration  
Erase all FLASH  
Set baud rate  
Exit  
ESC - Return to previous menu  
Choose one of the above:  
Figure B-1. Boot Manager Menu  
B-2  
The Boot Manager Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Appendix B Boot Manager  
Load New Software  
Select this option to download new software via the control port using the  
XMODEM protocol. During the download process, the new program code is  
downloaded to the Flash backup partition, thus erasing its previous contents.  
Upon completion, the newly downloaded Flash partition becomes the active  
partition, while the old version’s partition becomes the backup partition. The  
device automatically resets, running the new program stored in the active  
partition. Figure B-2 shows a dual image flash.  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Original  
S/W Version  
Copy 1  
Original  
S/W Version  
Copy 2  
Original  
S/W Version  
New  
S/W Version  
Active Partition  
Backup Partition  
Active Partition  
Backup Partition  
Step 3  
Original  
S/W Version  
New  
S/W Version  
Backup Partition  
Active Partition  
Figure B-2. Dual Image Flash  
Note  
Windows 95 terminal emulator, HyperTerminal, has the following bug: after  
changing baud rate, the status line presents the new value, but this value does not  
come into effect unless you perform the disconnect and connect commands  
immediately after the change.  
Partitions Status  
Select this option to display information about the status of the active (first) and  
the backup (second) flash partitions. Note that the Boot Manager menu also  
displays a partial status at the top of the menu:  
Active : 1998 Apr 16 14:56 FCD-IPM  
Backup : 1998 Apr 16 14:56 FCD-IPM  
The Boot Manager Menu  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Boot Manager  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Run Backup Partition  
Select this option to run the program stored in the backup partition of the Flash  
memory. Normally that program is the previous software version.  
The “backup” program runs once. The next hardware reset or Boot will run the  
program stored in the active partition.  
Reactivate Backup Partition  
Select this option to turn the backup partition into the active partition (and vice  
versa). In this way you can return to the previous software version permanently.  
This command may be executed up to 16 times, after which downloading of the  
new software will be required. Therefore avoid using this option for a one-time run  
of the old version (use the Run Backup Partition option for that purpose).  
Duplicate Active Partition  
Select this option to duplicate the program stored in the active partition into the  
backup partition.  
Erase Configuration  
Select this option to erase the device configuration parameters. The device  
configuration parameters are also stored in the flash memory. Sometimes these  
configuration parameters are needed after downloading a new version of Boot  
Manager. When the new version's parameter set is not fully compatible with the  
previous version's parameters, then you need to erase the previous version's  
parameters. You can also use this command to set the device to the default  
settings. The Erase Configuration command is also useful if you forget the  
password.  
Erase All FLASH  
Select this option to erase the device configuration parameters, and the programs  
stored in both partitions. Remember to download new software before attempting  
to operate the device.  
B-4  
The Boot Manager Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Appendix B Boot Manager  
Set Baud Rate  
Select this option to set the device’s baud rate to either 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6 or  
115.2 kbps. For software download, it is recommended to use the highest rate  
possible, i.e., 115.2 kbps. The baud rate must be higher than 9.6 kbps to enable  
downloading. Figure B-3 shows a diagram of setting the baud rate.  
FCD-IPM  
Modem  
Download Code  
Control Port  
(115.2) kbps.  
Figure B-3. Setting the Baud Rate  
Change your terminal baud rate and press Enter several times to ensure that the  
device identifies the new value.  
Note  
Windows 95 terminal emulator, HyperTerminal, has the following bug: after  
changing baud rate the status line presents the new value, but this value does not  
come into effect unless you perform the disconnect and connect commands  
immediately after performing the change.  
Exit  
Select this option to exit the Boot Manager menu and perform Boot/RESET FCD-  
IPM.  
If the Boot Manager is idle for more the two minutes, exit is performed  
automatically.  
The Boot Manager Menu  
B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Boot Manager  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
B-6  
The Boot Manager Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C  
SNMP Management  
This appendix provides the specific information required for managing FCD-IPM  
with the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).  
C.1 SNMP Environment  
This section describes the SNMP environment.  
The SNMP management functions of the FCD-IPM are provided by an internal  
SNMP agent, which can use in-band and out-of-band communication.  
The SNMP management communication uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP).  
UDP is a connectionless-mode transport protocol, part of the suite of protocols of  
the Internet Protocol (IP).  
This section covers the information related to the SNMP environment.  
SNMP Principles  
The SNMP management protocol is an asynchronous command/response polling  
protocol. All of the management traffic is initiated by the SNMP-based network  
management station, which addresses the managed entities in its management  
domain. Only the addressed managed entity answers the polling of the  
management station, except for trap messages.  
The managed entities include a function called an “SNMP agent”, which is  
responsible for interpretation and handling of the management station requests to  
the managed entity, and the generation of properly-formatted responses to the  
management station.  
SNMP Operations  
The SNMP protocol includes four types of operations:  
•
•
•
•
getRequest – Command for retrieving specific management information from  
the managed entity. The managed entity responds with a getResponse  
message.  
getNextRequest – Command for retrieving sequentially specific management  
information from the managed entity. The managed entity responds with a  
getResponse message.  
setRequest – Command for manipulating specific management information  
within the managed entity. The managed entity responds with a getResponse  
message.  
trap – Management message carrying unsolicited information on extraordinary  
events (that is, events which occurred not in response to a management  
operation) reported by the managed entity.  
SNMP Environment  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C SNMP Management  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
The Management Information Base  
The management information base (MIB) includes a collection of managed  
objects. A managed object is defined as a parameter that can be managed, such as  
a performance statistics value.  
The MIB includes the definitions of relevant managed objects. Various MIBs can  
be defined for various management purposes, types of equipment, etc.  
An object's definition includes the range of values (also called “instances”) and the  
“access” rights:  
•
•
•
•
Read-only - Instances of that object can be read, but cannot be set  
Read-write - Instances of that object can be read or set  
Write-only - Instances of that object can be set, but cannot be read  
Not accessible - Instances of that object cannot be read, nor set.  
MIB Structure  
The MIB has an inverted tree-like structure, with each definition of a managed  
object forming one leaf, located at the end of a branch of that tree. Each “leaf” in  
the MIB is reached by a unique path. By numbering the branching points from the  
top down, each leaf can be uniquely defined by a sequence of numbers. The  
formal description of the managed objects and the MIB structure is provided in a  
special standardized format, called Abstract Syntax Notation 1 (ASN.1).  
Since the general collection of MIBs can also be organized in a similar structure,  
under the supervision of the Internet Activities Board (IAB), any parameter  
included in a MIB that is recognized by the IAB is uniquely defined.  
MIBs are classified in various classes (branches): the experimental branch, and the  
group of private (enterprise-specific) branch. This is to provide the flexibility  
necessary in a global structure. Under the private enterprise-specific branch of  
MIBs, each enterprise (manufacturer) can be assigned a number, which is its  
enterprise number. The assigned number designates the top of an enterprise-  
specific sub-tree of non-standard MIBs. Within this context, RAD has been  
assigned the enterprise number 164. Therefore, enterprise MIBs published by RAD  
can be found under 1.3.6.1.4.1.164.  
MIBs of general interest are published by the IAB in the form of a Request for  
Comment (RFC) document. In addition, MIBs are also often assigned informal  
names that reflect their primary purpose. Enterprise-specific MIBs are published  
and distributed by their originator, which is responsible for their contents.  
C-2  
SNMP Environment  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Appendix C SNMP Management  
MIBs Supported by the FCD-IPM SNMP Agent  
The interpretation of the relevant MIBs is a function of the SNMP agent of each  
managed entity. The general MIBs supported by the SNMP agent are as follows:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
RFC1213  
RFC1215  
RFC1231  
RFC1659 – RS-232  
RFC1398 – Ethernet (dot3)  
RFC1406 – DS1  
RFC1471 – PPP  
RFC1473 – PPP-IP-Group  
RFC1724 – RIP  
RFC2011  
RFC2096 – IP-FORWARD  
ianaIfType  
RFC2233 – IfMIB  
RFC2127 – ISDN  
RFC2128 – ISDN  
RFC2115 – FR  
RFC3276 – SHDSL  
RAD private MIB.  
In addition, the FCD-IPM SNMP agent supports the RAD-private (enterprise-  
specific) MIB identified as (read the following as a continuous string):  
Iso(0).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4).enterprises(1).  
rad(164)  
Enterprise-specific MIBs supported by RAD equipment, including those for  
FCD-IPM, are available in ASN.1 format from the RAD Technical Support  
Department.  
Management Domains Under SNMP  
SNMP enables, in principle, each management station that knows the MIBs  
supported by a device to perform all the management operations available on that  
device. However, this is not desirable in practical situations, so it is necessary to  
provide a means to delimit management domains.  
SNMP Communities  
To enable the delimitation of management domains, SNMP uses “communities”.  
Each community is identified by a name, which is an alphanumeric string of up to  
255 characters defined by the user.  
Any SNMP entity (this term includes both managed entities and management  
stations) is assigned by its user a community name. In parallel, the user defines for  
each SNMP entity a list of the communities which are authorized to communicate  
SNMP Environment  
C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C SNMP Management  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
with it, and the access rights associated with each community (this is the SNMP  
community name table of the entity).  
In general, SNMP agents support two types of access rights:  
•
Read-only − the SNMP agent accepts and processes only SNMP getRequest  
and getNextRequest commands from management stations which have a  
read-only community name.  
•
Read-write − the SNMP agent accepts and processes all the SNMP commands  
received from a management station with a read-write community name.  
SNMP agents are usually configured to send traps to management stations  
having read-write communities.  
Authentication  
In accordance with the SNMP protocol, the SNMP community of the originating  
entity is sent in each message.  
When an SNMP message is received by the addressed entity, first it checks the  
originator's community: messages with community names not included in the  
SNMP community names table of the recipient are discarded (SNMP agents of  
managed entities usually report this event by means of an authentication failure  
trap).  
The SNMP agents of managed entities evaluate messages originated by  
communities appearing in the agent's SNMP Community Names table in  
accordance with the access rights, as explained above. Thus a setRequest for an  
MIB object with read-write access rights will nevertheless be rejected if it comes  
from a management station whose community has read-only rights with respect to  
that particular agent.  
C-4  
SNMP Environment  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Appendix C SNMP Management  
C.2 SNMP Configuration  
Indexing Convention  
The following is the indexing convention of the SNMP configuration:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lan1 ifindex = 1  
Lan2 ifindex = 2  
Link1 ifindex = 3  
Link2 ifindex = 4  
SubE1 ifindex = 5  
Voice1 ifindex = 6  
Voice2 ifindex = 7  
Voice3 ifindex = 8  
Voice4 ifindex = 9.  
Other indices are dynamic numbers which indicate higher protocol layers of the  
physical interfaces.  
Note  
The following indices are used for FCD-IPM with E1 over SHDSL interface:  
•
•
SHDSL – ifindex = 3  
E1 – dynamic.  
Configuration  
➤ To access SNMP configuration:  
1. Enter Security Setup menu.  
2. Choose Device Access Restrictions.  
3. Choose SNMP Access Status: Enable/Disable.  
Community Configuration  
➤ To enable community configuration:  
1. Enter Security Setup menu.  
2. Choose Device Access Restrictions.  
3. Choose either: SNMP Read, Write or Trap Community, depending on what  
you want to configure.  
4. Configure the community to the same setting as at the NMS station.  
Trap Configuration  
➤ To enable trap configuration:  
1. Enter Advanced Menu.  
SNMP Configuration  
C-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C SNMP Management  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
2. Choose Setup Host Parameters.  
3. Choose SNMP Manager Table.  
4. Add the NMS station IP address to the manager list.  
5. Choose YES under MASK parameter to open the trap mask.  
C.3 SNMP Traps  
The SNMP agent of the FCD-IPM supports the standard MIB-II traps. In addition,  
each FCD-IPM alarm is sent as a specific trap to the management station.  
Supported Traps  
The supported traps are:  
•
•
•
•
•
Cold Start  
Link Down  
Link Up  
Authentication Failure  
Dsx1LineStatusChange.  
This trap provides alarm indications for the following alarms:  
ꢀ 1 dsx1NoAlarm  
No alarm present  
ꢀ 2 dsx1RcvFarEndLOF  
ꢀ 16 dsx1XmtAIS  
Far end LOF (Yellow alarm)  
Near end sending AIS  
Near end LOF (Red alarm)  
Near end loss of signal  
Near end is looped  
ꢀ 32 dsx1LossOfFrame  
ꢀ 64 dsx1LossOfSignal  
ꢀ 128 dsx1LoopbackState  
ꢀ 512 dsx1RcvFarEndLOMF  
Far end sending TS16 LOMF  
ꢀ 1024 dsx1XmtFarEndLOMF Near end sending TS16 LOMF.  
C-6  
SNMP Traps  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
Glossary  
10BaseT - 10BaseT is a LAN protocol that allows stations to be attached via  
twisted pair cable.  
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) - ARP is a method for finding a host's Ethernet  
address from its Internet address. The sender broadcasts an ARP packet containing  
the Internet address of another host and waits for the second host to send back its  
Ethernet address.  
ARP is defined in RFC 826.  
Bandwidth - Bandwidth is the rate at which data passes through the link. The  
greater the bandwidth, the more information can be sent through the link at a  
particular time.  
Bridging - Bridging is the forwarding of traffic between network segments based  
on data link layer information. These segments have a common network layer  
address.  
Broadcast - Broadcast is a transmission to multiple, unspecified recipients. On an  
Ethernet network, a broadcast packet is a special type of multicast packet which all  
nodes on the network are always willing to receive.  
Default Gateway - Default Gateway is a routing table entry that is used to direct  
packets addressed to hosts or networks not explicitly listed in the routing table.  
DHCP - The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides a framework  
for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP/IP network.  
DLCI (Data Link Control Identifier) - DLCI is a channel number that is attached  
to data frames to tell the network how to route the data in Frame Relay Networks.  
DNS (Domain Name System) - DNS is a general-purpose distributed, replicated,  
data query service chiefly used on Internet for translating hostnames into Internet  
IP addresses.  
DNS is defined in STD 13, RFCs 1034 and 1035.  
Dynamic Station - A dynamic station is a host that is added automatically to an  
ARP or LAN table.  
E1/T1 - E1/T1 services provide high-speed connections. E1/T1 supports Frame  
Relay, PPP and HDLC, providing the flexibility to support high-performance point-  
to-point or point-to-multipoint topologies.  
Firewall - A firewall system controls access to or from a protected network (i.e., a  
site). It implements a network access policy by forcing connections to pass through  
the firewall, where they can be examined and evaluated.  
Frame Relay - Frame Relay is a packet-switching protocol for connecting devices  
on a WAN. Frame Relay networks support data rates up to 1.544Mbps.  
D-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Glossary  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
I/O - Data Channel Interfaces that can be operated as n x 64k or n x 56k data port  
(DCE only).  
IP Address - The IP Address is a 32-bit host address. It is usually represented in  
dotted decimal notation, e.g. 128.121.4.5. The address can be split into a network  
number (or network address) and a host number unique to each host on the  
network and sometimes also a subnet address.  
IP Address is defined in RFC 791.  
IP Mask - The IP mask is a unique 4 byte (32 bit) value that allow the recipient of  
IP packets to distinguish between different host IDs.  
IP/IPX Routing - IP/IPX Routing is the process, performed by a router, of selecting  
the correct interface and next hop for a packet being forwarded. Routing is done  
in order to send a packet to a specific destination.  
IPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange) - IPX is a network layer protocol used in  
Novell NetWare file server operating system.  
A router with IPX routing can interconnect LANs so that Netware clients and  
servers can communicate.  
Leased Lines - A leased line is a private telephone circuit permanently connecting  
two points, normally provided on a lease by a local PTT.  
MAC (Media Access Control) - MAC is the lower sublayer of the data link layer.  
MAC is the interface between a node's Logical Link Control and the network's  
physical layer. The MAC differs for various physical media.  
MAC Address - The MAC Address is the hardware address of a device connected  
to a shared network medium.  
Mask - A mask is a filtering aid that is used to define classes of addresses. By  
defining classes, any packet can be judged as to whether it should pass the filter or  
not.  
MTU (Maximum Transmit Unit) - The Maximum Transmission Unit is the largest  
frame length which may be sent on a physical medium.  
MultiCast - MultiCast is an Ethernet addressing scheme used to send packets to  
devices of a certain type or for broadcasting to all nodes.  
NAT – Network Address Translation converts source/destination IP/UDP ports  
according to management configurations. Address translation allows hosts in a  
private network and vice versa. NAT is implemented by modifying end node  
addresses en-route and maintaining a state for these updates so that datagrams  
pertaining to a session are routed to the right end-node in either realm.  
This solution only works when the applications do not use the IP addresses as part  
of the protocol itself. Even if the NAT includes a mechanism for changing the  
upper layer protocols IP, encrypted frames will fail in the NAT.  
NCP (NetWare Core Protocol) - NCP is a Novell trademark for the protocol used  
to access Novell NetWare file and print service functions. NCP uses an underlying  
IPX or IP transport protocol.  
D-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Appendix D Glossary  
NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface) - NetBEUI is the network transport  
protocol used by all of Microsoft network systems and IBM LAN Server based  
systems.  
Parity - Parity is an extra bit added to a byte or word to reveal errors in storage (in  
RAM or disk) or transmission. Even/odd parity means that the parity bit is set so  
that there are an even/odd number of one bits in the word, including the parity  
bit. Odd parity means that the parity bit is set so that there are an odd number of  
one bits in the word, including the parity bit.  
PPP (Point to Point Protocol) - PPP is the protocol defined in RFC 1661, the  
Internet standard for transmitting network layer datagrams (e.g., IP packets) over  
serial point-to-point links.  
PPP is designed to operate both over asynchronous connections and bit-oriented  
synchronous systems, it can configure connections to a remote network  
dynamically, and test that the link is usable. PPP can be configured to encapsulate  
different network layer protocols (such as IP, IPX, or AppleTalk) by using the  
appropriate network.  
Protocol - A protocol is a set of formal rules describing how to transmit data across  
a network. Low level protocols define the electrical and physical standards to be  
observed, bit- and byte-ordering, and the transmission, error detection and  
correction of the bit stream. High level protocols deal with the data formatting,  
including the syntax of messages, the terminal to computer dialogue, character  
sets, sequencing of messages, etc.  
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) - PSTN is the collection of  
interconnected systems operated by the various telephone companies and  
administrations (PTTs) around the world.  
RFC (Request for Comment) - RFC is a numbered Internet informational  
documents and standards widely followed by commercial software and freeware  
in the Internet and UNIX communities.  
RIP (Routing Information Protocol) - RIP is the companion protocol to IPX for  
exchange of routing information in a Novell network. It is not related to the  
Internet protocol of the same name.  
SAP - SAP is the OSI term for the component of a network address that identifies  
the individual application on a host which is sending or receiving a packet.  
SHDSL is an international standard for symmetric DSL, developed by the ITU  
(G.991.2). It provides for sending and receiving high-speed symmetrical data  
streams over a single pair of copper wire, at rates between 192 kbps and  
2.31 Mbps. SHDSL incorporates features of other DSL technologies, such as ADSL,  
SDSL, and will transport T1, E1, ATM, and IP signals.  
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) - SNMP is the Internet standard  
protocol, defined in STD 15, RFC 1157, developed to manage nodes on an IP  
network.  
SOCKS - SOCKS is a security package that allows a host behind a firewall to use  
Finger, FTP, Telnet, Gopher, and Mosaic to access resources outside the firewall  
while maintaining the security requirements.  
D-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D Glossary  
FCD-IPM Installation and Operation Manual  
Spoofing - Spoofing is a technique used to reduce network overhead, especially in  
a WAN. Some network protocols send frequent packets for management  
purposes. These can be routing updates or keep-alive messages. In a WAN this can  
introduce significant overhead, due to the typically smaller bandwidth of WAN  
connections.  
Spoofing reduces the required bandwidth by having devices, such as bridges or  
routers, answer for the remote devices. This fools (spoofs) the LAN device into  
thinking the remote LAN is still connected, even though it's not. The spoofing saves  
the WAN bandwidth, because no packet is ever sent out on the WAN.  
SPX (Sequenced Packet Exchange) - SPX is a transport layer protocol built on top  
of IPX. SPX is used in Novell NetWare systems for communications in client/server  
application programs, e.g., BTRIEVE (ISAM manager).  
Static Station - A static station is a host, which is added manually to an ARP or  
LAN table.  
Stop Bit - Stop Bits mark the end of a unit of transmission (normally a byte or  
character). In serial communications, where each bit of the message is transmitted  
in sequence, stop bits are extra "1" bits which follow the data and any parity bit.  
Synchronous Transmission - Synchronous transmission is when data bits are  
transmitted at a fixed rate. The sender and the receiver are synchronized.  
TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) - TCP is the most common transport layer  
protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.  
TCP is built on top of Internet Protocol (IP) and is nearly always seen in the  
combination TCP/IP (TCP over IP). It adds reliable communication, flow-control,  
multiplexing and connection-oriented communication. It provides full-duplex,  
process-to-process connections.  
TCP is defined in STD 7, RFC 793.  
TCP/IP stack (Transmission Control Protocol over Internet Protocol) -TCP/IP  
stack is the standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD UNIX. While  
TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to  
the entire DoD protocol suite based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and  
RDP.  
TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol ) - TFTP is a simple file transfer protocol used  
for down-loading boot code to diskless workstations.  
Throughput - Throughput is the amount of data a communications channel can  
carry, usually in bytes per second.  
UDP (User Datagram Protocol) - UDP is an Internet standard network layer,  
transport layer and session layer protocols which provide simple but unreliable  
datagram services. It adds a checksum and additional process-to-process  
addressing information. UDP is a connectionless protocol which, like TCP, is  
layered on top of IP.  
UDP is defined in STD 6, RFC 768.  
WAN (Wide Area Network) - A WAN is a network, usually constructed with serial  
lines, extending over distances greater than one kilometer.  
D-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DC Power Supply Connection – Terminal Block Connector  
Note: Ignore this supplement if the unit is  
AC-powered.  
Certain DC-powered units are equipped with a plastic 3-pin  
VDC-IN power input connector, located on the unit rear panel.  
Different variations of the connector are shown in Figure 1. All  
are functionally identical.  
A
B
C
Supplied with such units is a kit including a mating Terminal  
Block (TB) type connector plug for attaching to your power  
supply cable.  
Connect the wires of your power supply cable to the TB plug,  
according to the voltage polarity and assembly instructions  
provided below.  
Caution: Prepare all connections to the TB plug before  
D
E
inserting it into the unit’s VDC-IN connector.  
Figure 1. TB DC Input Connectors Types  
Appearing on Unit Panels  
Preparing and Connecting the Power  
Supply Cable with the TB Plug  
Typical DC Power  
Input Connector  
(on unit panel)  
Wire stripping  
dimensions  
Refer to Figure 2 for assistance.  
20 mm  
5 mm  
1. Strip the insulation of your power supply wires  
according to the dimensions shown.  
2. Place each wire lead into the appropriate TB  
plug terminal according to the voltage polarity  
mapping shown in Figure 4. (If a terminal is  
not already open, loosen its screw).  
Afterwards, tighten close the three terminal  
screws.  
Terminal screws  
See following page  
for wire mapping  
3. Pull a nylon cable tie (supplied) around the  
power supply cable to secure it firmly to the  
TB plug grip, passing the tie through the holes  
on the grip.  
Nylon cable tie  
TB plug grip  
4. Isolate the exposed terminal screws/wire  
leads using a plastic sleeve or insulating tape,  
to prevent the possibility of short-circuit.  
DC power  
cable  
Mating  
TB Connector  
Plug  
5. Connect the assembled power supply cable to  
the unit by inserting the TB plug into the unit’s  
VDC-IN connector until it snaps into place.  
Figure 2. TB Plug Assembly  
SUP-220-03/03  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: Certain TB plugs are equipped with captive  
screws for securing the assembled cable’s  
TB plug to the unit’s VDC-IN connector (C and  
E types only). To secure the plug, tighten the two  
screws on the plug into the corresponding holes  
on the sides of the input connector as shown in  
Figure 3.  
Captive  
screws  
Figure 3. TB Plug with Captive Screws (optional)  
DC Power Supply Wire Voltage Polarity  
Refer to Figure 4 for proper mapping of the power supply  
wire leads to the TB plug’s three terminals.  
TB Connector  
Plug  
Warning:  
• Reversing the wire voltage polarity can cause damage to  
the unit!  
0
-48  
or  
-24  
( )  
• Always connect a ground (earth) wire to the TB plug’s  
Chassis (frame) Ground terminal. Connecting the unit  
without a protective ground, or interruption of the  
grounding (for example, by using an extension power cord  
without a grounding conductor) can cause harm to the unit  
or to the equipment connected to it!  
Chassis (frame)  
Ground  
-
+
Negative pole  
Positive pole  
24/48VDC  
Figure 4. Power Supply Wire Mapping  
to TB Plug  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24 Raoul Wallenberg St., Tel Aviv 69719, Israel  
Tel: +972-3-6458181, Fax: +972-3-6483331, +972-3-6498250  
E-mail: [email protected], Web site:  
www.rad.com  
Customer Response Form  
RAD Data Communications would like your help in improving its product documentation.  
Please complete and return this form by mail or by fax or send us an e-mail with your  
comments.  
Thank you for your assistance!  
______________________________________________________________  
FCD-IPM  
Manual Name:  
__________________________________________________________  
702-200-08/03  
Publication Number:  
Please grade the manual according to the following factors:  
Excellent  
Good  
Fair  
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
Poor  
❒
Very Poor  
Installation instructions  
Operating instructions  
Manual organization  
Illustrations  
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
The manual as a whole  
❒
What did you like about the manual?  
___________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Report  
Incompatibility with product  
Difficulty in understanding text  
Regulatory information (Safety, Compliance, Warnings, etc.)  
Difficulty in finding needed information  
Missing information  
Type of Error(s)  
or Problem(s):  
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
Illogical flow of information  
Style (spelling, grammar, references, etc.)  
Appearance  
Other _________  
Please list the exact page numbers with the error(s), detail the errors you found (information missing,  
unclear or inadequately explained, etc.) and attach the page to your fax, if necessary.  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
Please add any comments or suggestions you may have.  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
_________________________________________________________________________________________  
You are:  
❒
❒
❒
❒
Distributor  
End user  
VAR  
Other ________________________  
Who is your distributor?  
Your name and company  
_______________________________  
___________________________________________________________  
:
__________________________________________________________________________  
Job title:  
Address: __________________________________________________________________________  
_______________________________________________  
Direct telephone number and extension:  
______________________________________________________________________  
Fax number:  
_____________________________________________________________________  
E-mail:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
www.rad.com  
INTERNATIONAL HEADQUARTERS:  
24 Raoul Wallenberg Street, Tel Aviv 69719, Israel, Tel: 972-3-6458181  
Fax: 972-3-6498250, 972-3-6474436, Email: [email protected]  
U.S. HEADQUARTERS:  
900 Corporate Drive, Mahwah, N.J. 07430, Tel: (201) 529-1100  
Toll Free: 1-800-444-7234, Fax: (201) 529-5777, Email: [email protected]  
Publication No. 702-200-08/03  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

RCA Projection Television R61WH76 User Guide
Remington Power Tools Chainsaw 104317, PS1510A User Guide
Renesas Computer Hardware M34553T PTCA User Guide
Rosewill Computer Hardware G03 ATI9000 User Guide
Runco Projector Vision 85 User Guide
Russell Hobbs Washer RH1247B User Guide
Salton Oven FAC800TO User Guide
Samsung Flat Panel Television 400TS 3 User Guide
Samsung Microwave Oven DE68 02258E User Guide
Samsung Refrigerator RB195AB User Guide